WO2021051313A1 - Switching method and device - Google Patents

Switching method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021051313A1
WO2021051313A1 PCT/CN2019/106474 CN2019106474W WO2021051313A1 WO 2021051313 A1 WO2021051313 A1 WO 2021051313A1 CN 2019106474 W CN2019106474 W CN 2019106474W WO 2021051313 A1 WO2021051313 A1 WO 2021051313A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
iab
node
target
donor
iab node
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/106474
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
刘菁
史玉龙
戴明增
曹振臻
朱元萍
卓义斌
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/106474 priority Critical patent/WO2021051313A1/en
Priority to CN201980100408.7A priority patent/CN114402661B/en
Publication of WO2021051313A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021051313A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/16Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/20Selecting an access point

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a handover method and device.
  • UE User Equipment
  • IAB node Integrated Access and Backhaul node
  • Donor User Equipment
  • IAB node Integrated Access and Backhaul node
  • the handover in the prior art only needs to consider the handover of the UE between the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor.
  • IAB node can be set in mobile application scenarios such as trains, cars, drones, etc.
  • IAB node and its child nodes such as UE or other IAB nodes
  • the whole for example: group
  • a perfect handover scheme has not yet been proposed.
  • the present application provides a switching method and device, so as to provide a complete switching solution and improve the diversity of application scenarios.
  • the embodiments of this application provide a handover method, which can be applied to a source IAB donor.
  • the method may include: the source IAB donor receives the measurement result reported by the IAB node, and the measurement result includes the signal measurement result of the source cell and the target At least one of the signal measurement results of the cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell belongs to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor determines to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result reported by the IAB node, and can send the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor.
  • at least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
  • the source IAB donor can obtain the signal status between the IAB node and the source IAB donor and/or between the IAB node and the target IAB donor node based on the measurement results reported by the IAB node, so as to determine whether the IAB node needs to be And at least one child node of the IAB attached to it switches to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor determines to switch the IAB node and its at least one child node to the target IAB donor, it can send the context information of the locally cached IAB node and the context information of at least one child node to the target IAB donor, so that The target IAB donor prepares for the handover of the IAB node and at least one child node, so as to realize the handover of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor.
  • the present application can be applied to the scenario of moving the IAB node, that is, in the scenario where the IAB node is moving and the IAB donor needs to be switched, the group switching of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it can be realized.
  • this application can also be applied to the handover scenarios of fixed IAB nodes.
  • the IAB node is deployed in the overlapping area covered by the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor. This can also be achieved when the IAB node needs to switch the IAB donor. Group switching of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it. That is to say, as long as the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it perform group switching, it is applicable to the solution of this application, and this application is not limited.
  • the method may further include: the source IAB donor receives the first configuration information sent by the target IAB donor that the IAB node needs to switch to the target IAB donor, and at least one child node of the IAB node switches to the target IAB The second configuration information required by the donor; and, the source IAB donor sends the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sends the first configuration information to the IAB node.
  • the target IAB donor can prepare the switch between the IAB node and the at least one child node of the IAB node based on the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node received from the source IAB donor. For example, sending the first configuration information required for switching to the target IABdonor to the IAB node, and sending the second configuration information required for switching to the target IABdonor to at least one child node of the IAB node, so as to transfer the second configuration information to the source IAB donor.
  • the configuration information and the first configuration information are respectively sent to at least one child node of the IAB node and the IAB node.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE peering with the target IAB donor, the UE and the target IAB donor The security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor and the NCC value corresponding to the security key used between the UE and the target IAB donor.
  • the UE which is a child node of the IAB node, can communicate with the target IAB donor based on the second configuration information after switching to the target IAB donor.
  • the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message; or the context information of the IAB node is carried in the first message, and the IAB node
  • the context information of at least one child node of is carried in n second messages, the n second messages correspond to at least one child node one-to-one, and n is equal to the number of at least one child node.
  • the source IAB donor can send the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node to the target IAB donor in two ways.
  • One is the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node. Carried in the first message.
  • the first message may be a handover request message in 3GPP, or a newly defined XnAP message.
  • the other is that the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node are carried in different messages.
  • sending context information of the IAB node and context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor also includes: sending to the target IAB donor The identification information of the UE; the identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification C-RNTI of the UE in the cell of the IAB node.
  • the source IAB donor sends the context information of the UE to the target IAB donor, and also needs to send the UE identification information to the target IAB donor, so that the target The IAB donor matches or associates the context information of the UE with the identification information of the UE.
  • the context information of the other IAB nodes includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB nodes; the context information of the DU includes at least one of the following : DU identification information, identification CGI of at least one cell served by DU, physical cell identification PCI of at least one cell served by DU, RRC version supported by DU, and indication information of whether at least one cell served by DU is activated.
  • the source IAB donor can send to the target IAB donor the identification information of the DU of the other IAB node and the status of at least one cell served by the DU. Instruction information to be activated, etc.
  • the target IAB donor may determine which of the at least one cell served by the DU is an activated cell based on the indication information.
  • sending the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor also includes: sending the topology information to the target IAB donor, and the topology information is used to indicate that the IAB node and the The topological relationship between at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
  • the present application can realize the handover between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node in a multi-hop scenario.
  • the method may further include: the source IAB donor receives the new cell global identity and the old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor; and sends the IAB node’s global identity to the IAB node The global identity of the new cell and the global identity of the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU; or, the source IAB donor receives the global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor; and sends the IAB node’s global identity to the IAB node The global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU.
  • the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor;
  • the old cell global identifier is the IAB node access source IAB donor using the cell global identifier.
  • the IAB node can obtain the global identity of the new cell allocated by the target IAB donor for at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node, so that the IAB node can update the local global identity of the old cell.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a handover method, which is applied to access a turn-integrated IAB node.
  • the method includes: the IAB node sends a measurement result to the source IAB donor; and the IAB node can receive the source IAB donor.
  • the method further includes: obtaining the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; where the new cell global identity is the cell global identity used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; The IAB node access source IAB donor uses the global identity of the old cell.
  • the old identification information of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node that is, the update of the global identification CGI of the old cell, is implemented, so that the IAB node can update the identification information of at least one child node based on the new CGI.
  • the method further includes: sending an indication message to the target IAB donor, where the indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
  • the IAB node when the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, it can indicate the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity to the target IAB donor, so that the target IAB donor can learn the global identity of the new cell of the IAB node and update the locally cached UE’s
  • the identifier that is, the old CGI and C-RNTI of the IAB node accessed by the UE are updated to the new CGI and C-RNTI.
  • the indication message also includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  • the method further includes: the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the identification information of the UE sent by the target IAB donor; wherein the identification information of the UE includes the UE access The old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU; or, the identification information of the UE includes the new cell of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node. The global identity of the cell and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
  • the IAB node and the target IAB donor can unify the UE’s identification information, that is, both update the UE’s identification information to new identification information.
  • the new identification information includes the new CGI and C-RNTI, so that the IAB node and the target IAB donor can be Based on the new identification information of the UE, the corresponding UE is identified and a bearer is established for the UE.
  • the method further includes: receiving the F1 interface identifier of the target IAB donor assigned to the UE by the source IAB donor, and the F1 interface It is the interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
  • the IAB node and the target IAB donor can also identify the corresponding UE through the identifier of the F1 interface, so as to establish a corresponding bearer for the UE.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a switching device, which can be applied to a source IAB donor.
  • the device includes: a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled, the memory stores program instructions, and the program instructions are executed by the processor
  • the handover device is caused to perform the following steps: receive the measurement result reported by the IAB node, the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell Belongs to the target IAB donor; based on the measurement result, it is determined to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor, then the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor; among them, at least one child of the IAB node
  • the nodes include user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
  • the switching device executes the following steps: receiving the first configuration information required by the IAB node from the target IAB donor to switch to the target IAB donor, and at least the IAB node The second configuration information required for a child node to switch to the target IAB donor; sending the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sending the first configuration information to the IAB node.
  • the second configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE peering with the target IAB donor, the UE and the target IAB donor The security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor and the NCC value corresponding to the security key used between the UE and the target IAB donor.
  • the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message; or, the context information of the IAB node is carried in the first message, and at least the context information of the IAB node
  • the context information of a child node is carried in n second messages, the n second messages correspond to at least one child node one-to-one, and n is equal to the number of at least one child node.
  • the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor.
  • the program instructions are executed by the processor, Make the handover device perform the following steps: send the identification information of the UE to the target IAB donor; the identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification of the UE in the cell of the IAB node C-RNTI.
  • the context information of the other IAB nodes includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB nodes; the context information of the DU includes at least one of the following : DU identification information, identification CGI of at least one cell served by DU, physical cell identification PCI of at least one cell served by DU, RRC version supported by DU, and indication information of whether at least one cell served by DU is activated.
  • the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor.
  • the switching device executes the following steps: Send topology information, where the topology information is used to indicate the topological relationship between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
  • the handover device executes the following steps: the source IAB donor receives the new cell global identity and the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor Global ID; send to the IAB node the global ID of the new cell and the global ID of the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; or, the source IAB donor receives the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor Global identity: Send the global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node.
  • the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the old cell global identifier is the IAB node access source IAB donor using the cell global identifier.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a switching device, which can be applied to an IAB node.
  • the device includes: a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled, the memory stores program instructions, and the program instructions are executed by the processor.
  • the switching device performs the following steps: sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor; receiving the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the source IAB donor and at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor.
  • Required second configuration information at least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes; and sends the second configuration information to at least one child node.
  • the handover device executes the following steps: Obtain the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; where the new cell global identity is the IAB node Switch to the global identity of the cell used by the target IAB donor; the global identity of the old cell used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
  • the switching device executes the following steps after acquiring the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node: Send an instruction message to the target IAB donor,
  • the indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
  • the indication message also includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  • the switching device executes the following steps: the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the UE identifier sent by the target IAB donor Information; wherein, the UE’s identification information includes the old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the UE’s cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI in the cell served by the DU; or, the UE’s identity information includes the UE The global identity of the new cell of the cell served by the DU accessing the IAB node and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
  • the switching device executes the following steps: Receive the target IAB donor sent by the source IAB donor The identifier of the F1 interface assigned to the UE.
  • the F1 interface is the interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a handover system.
  • the system may include a source IAB donor, a target IAB donor, an IAB node, and at least one child node of the IAB node, where at least one child node of the IAB node includes UE and / Or other IAB nodes; among them, the IAB node is used to send the measurement result to the source IAB donor, the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB Donor, the target cell belongs to the target IAB donor; the source IAB donor is used to determine to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result, and then send the context information of the IAB node and the context of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor Information; the target IAB donor is used to send to the source IAB the first configuration information required by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor and
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, the computer program including instructions for executing the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes a processing circuit and transceiver pins.
  • the transceiver pin and the processing circuit communicate with each other through an internal connection path, and the processing circuit executes the method in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to control the receiving pin to receive the signal, and Control the sending pin to send signals.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes a processing circuit and transceiver pins.
  • the transceiver pin and the processing circuit communicate with each other through an internal connection path, and the processing circuit executes the method in the second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect to control the receiving pin to receive the signal, and Control the sending pin to send signals.
  • FIG. 1 is one of the schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application
  • FIG. 2 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 5 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 6 is one of the schematic diagrams of the handover preparation process provided by the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is one of the schematic diagrams of the handover preparation process provided by the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is one of the schematic flow diagrams of the handover process provided by the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is one of the schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is one of the schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is one of the schematic flowcharts of the handover method provided by the embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is one of the schematic flowcharts of the handover method provided by the embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB donor provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB node provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • first and second in the description and claims of the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific order of objects.
  • first target object and the second target object are used to distinguish different target objects, rather than to describe the specific order of the target objects.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used as examples, illustrations, or illustrations. Any embodiment or design solution described as “exemplary” or “for example” in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as being more preferable or advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions. To be precise, words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to present related concepts in a specific manner.
  • multiple processing units refer to two or more processing units; multiple systems refer to two or more systems.
  • the IAB node that triggers the handover (or triggers the group handover) is called the handover IAB node, and the handover IAB node includes the following four scenarios before the handover is performed:
  • the source IAB donor is the parent node of the handover IAB node (the handover IAB node is the child node of the source IAB donor), and the handover IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is the child node of the handover IAB node). As shown in Figure 1.
  • the source IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node
  • the switching IAB node is the parent node of the other IAB node (the other IAB node is the child node of the switching IAB node)
  • the other IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is another IAB child node of node). That is: switching between IAB node and UE has one or more other IAB nodes, for example: switching IAB node is the parent node of IAB node A, IAB node A is the parent node of UE, or IAB node A is IAB node B Parent node, IAB node B is the parent node of the UE. as shown in picture 2.
  • the source IAB donor is the parent node of other IAB nodes (other IAB nodes are the child nodes of the source IAB donor), and other IAB nodes are the parent nodes of the switch IAB node (the switch IAB node is the child node of other IAB nodes), switch The IAB node is the parent node of the UE. That is: there are one or more other IAB nodes between the source IAB donor and the switching IAB node, for example: the source IAB donor is the parent node of IAB node C, IAB node C is the parent node of switching IAB node, or IAB node C is The parent node of IAB node D, and IAB node D is the parent node of switching IAB node. As shown in Figure 3.
  • the source IAB donor is the parent node of another IAB node
  • the other IAB node is the parent node of the switch IAB node
  • the switch IAB node is the parent node of other IAB nodes except other IAB nodes, except for other IAB nodes
  • the other IAB nodes are the parent nodes of the UE. That is, there are one or more other IAB nodes between the source IAB donor and the handover IAB node, and there are one or more other IAB nodes between the handover IAB node and the UE.
  • the source IAB donor is the parent node of IAB node C
  • IAB node C is the parent node of switching IAB node
  • IAB node C is the parent node of IAB node D
  • IAB node D is the parent node of switching IAB node.
  • Handover IAB node is the parent node of IAB node A
  • IAB node A is the parent node of UE
  • IAB node A is the parent node of IAB node B
  • IAB node B is the parent node of UE.
  • the target IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node (the switching IAB node is the child node of the target IAB donor), or the target IAB donor and the switching IAB node There are one or more other IAB nodes.
  • Handover IAB node During the handover process, all or part of the sub-nodes of the IAB node (for example: UE or other IAB nodes) are handed over along with the IAB node.
  • the sub-nodes of the IAB node for example: UE or other IAB nodes
  • this patent mainly uses scenarios 1 and 2 as examples, that is, before switching the IAB node, the source IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node (the switching IAB node is the child node of the source IAB donor).
  • the switching IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is the child node of the switching IAB node), or the switching IAB node is the parent node of other IAB nodes (the other IAB node is the child node of the switching IAB node), and the other IAB nodes are the UE’s Parent node (UE is a child node of other IAB node).
  • the target IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node.
  • the foregoing application scenarios or communication systems can be used to support fourth-generation (4G) access technologies, such as long-term evolution (LTE) access technologies; or, the communication system can also support fifth-generation (fifth generation) access technologies.
  • 4G fourth-generation
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • NR new radio
  • the IAB node consists of the IAB node mobile terminal (Mobile Termination, MT) and the IAB node distributed unit (Distributed Unit, DU) consists of two parts.
  • IAB donor consists of IAB donor Central Unit (CU) and IAB donor DU.
  • the interface between IAB donor CU and IAB donor DU is the F1 interface, IAB donor CU and IAB node DU
  • the interface between is an F1 interface (or F1* interface), which is not limited in this application.
  • IAB node DU has some of the functions of the base station, such as the physical layer (PHY) of the base station, the media access control (MAC) layer, and the radio link control (Radio Link Control). ,
  • the function of the RLC) layer is used to provide access services to the child nodes attached to it.
  • the IAB node MT is connected to the parent node of the IAB node according to the function similar to the UE in the air interface.
  • IAB donor DU has similar functions to IAB node DU.
  • the IAB donor CU is used to control and manage all IAB nodes and UEs under it.
  • IAB donor CU can further adopt the architecture of separating the user plane and the control plane, that is, including the IAB donor CU-UP (user plane) entity and the IAB donor CU-CP (control plane) entity, IAB donor CU-UP and IAB
  • the interface between the donor CU-CP is an E1 interface.
  • Figure 5 shows an exemplary application scenario diagram.
  • the application scenario includes: Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF)/User Plane Function (User Plane Function, UPF), source IAB donor, target IAB donor, handover IAB node and UE.
  • AMF Access and Mobility Management Function
  • UPF User Plane Function
  • the process of switching the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor can be divided into two parts.
  • the first part is the handover preparation process.
  • the source IAB donor migrates the context information of the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor, and notifies the target IAB donor to prepare corresponding resources for the IAB node and its child nodes.
  • the specific steps can be shown in Figure 6 or Figure 7.
  • the second part is the handover process. After the target IAB donor is ready, the handover process between the UE and the IAB node can be executed. The specific steps are shown in Figure 8.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation process provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation process provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation process provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • Step 101 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a handover request message (Handover Request) to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Handover Request a handover request message
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP determines that it is necessary to switch the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor. There are several possibilities:
  • the measurement results include the signal quality measurement results of the handover IAB node MT on the serving cell and the neighbor cell, where the neighbor cell includes the cell of the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that it needs to switch the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP can obtain the instruction information for instructing the switch IAB node to be a mobile IAB node during the initial access process of the IAB node MT.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP can determine the need to change the Switch the child node of the IAB node and switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor together.
  • the IAB node MT when it accesses the source IAB donor, it will send a mobile IAB node indication message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to indicate that the mobile IAB node is currently accessing the network.
  • the indication information may be carried in the RRC connection establishment request message (RRCSetupRequest), or may be carried in the RRC connection establishment complete message (RRCSetupComplete).
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that the handover IAB node MT needs to be switched to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that the child node of the handover IAB node and the handover IAB node need to be switched to the target IAB donor together.
  • the indication information is used to instruct the source IAB donor CU-CP to regard the switching IAB node and the child nodes of the IAB node as a group, or to instruct the switching IAB node child nodes and the switching IAB node to switch together.
  • the indication information may be indication information of group movement, or indication information of group switching, or group identification.
  • the handover request message includes at least one of the following information: UE context information, UE identification information, context information for handover IAB node MT, handover IAB node MT identification information, and handover IAB node DU Contextual information.
  • the context information of the UE includes at least one of the following information: QoS information of the UE service, configuration information carried by the UE air interface (for example: PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer configuration, and/or Logical Channel (LCH) Configuration, etc.), the security algorithms supported by the UE, etc.
  • QoS information of the UE service for example: PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer configuration, and/or Logical Channel (LCH) Configuration, etc.
  • configuration information carried by the UE air interface for example: PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer configuration, and/or Logical Channel (LCH) Configuration, etc.
  • LCH Logical Channel
  • the context information for switching IAB node MT includes at least one of the following information: switching IAB node MT QoS information, switching IAB node MT air interface bearer configuration information, switching IAB node MT supporting security algorithms, and so on.
  • the context information of the handover IAB node DU includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the DU, the identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU, the physical cell identity PCI of at least one cell served by the DU, the RRC version supported by the DU, and at least the Information indicating whether a cell is activated.
  • the identifier of the DU may be the DU ID, or may also be the name of the DU (DU name).
  • the indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated may be a displayed indication or an implicit indication.
  • the context information of the handover IAB node DU includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the DU, the identity of at least one activated cell served by the DU, the CGI, and the identity of at least one activated cell served by the DU.
  • the identification information of the UE includes but is not limited to: Cell Global Identifier (CGI) and Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI).
  • CGI is the cell global identity of the cell where the UE is attached
  • C-RNTI is the identity allocated to the UE by the cell where the UE is attached.
  • the UE is a child node of the handover IAB node, before and after the handover of the IAB node, the UE is always attached to the same cell where the IAB node is handed over, but because the handover IAB node is from the source IAB donor Switching to the target IAB donor causes the cell identification CGI of the cell to change, from the old CGI (old CGI) to the new CGI (new CGI).
  • the old CGI belongs to the source IAB donor, that is, the old CGI contains the base station identifier of the source IAB donor.
  • the new CGI belongs to the target IAB donor, that is, the new CGI contains the base station identifier of the target IAB donor.
  • the other IAB node is the child node of the handover IAB node, and the UE is the child node of the other IAB node
  • the UE is always attached to the same cell of other IAB nodes, and other IAB nodes are always attached to the same cell where the IAB node is handed over.
  • the host node changes from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor, other IAB nodes and other IAB nodes are always attached to the same cell.
  • the F1 interface between the host nodes changes. Therefore, the cell identification CGI of the cell where the UE is attached to another IAB node changes, from the old CGI to the new CGI.
  • the identification information of the UE is composed of the old CGI and C-RNTI.
  • the identification information of the UE is composed of the new CGI and C-RNTI.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP after the target IAB donor CU-CP receives the context information of the UE and the identification information of the UE, it can associate (or match) the context information of the UE with the identification information of the UE. That is, the target IAB donor CU-CP can Through the identification information of the UE, the context corresponding to the UE is found.
  • the handover request message may be an Xn interface application protocol (Application Protocol, XnAP) message.
  • the handover request message may be a Handover Request message defined in the 3GPP standard.
  • the handover request message may also be a newly defined XnAP message. That is to say, in this application, when the handover IAB node prepares for handover, the Handover Request message defined in the 3GPP standard can be used to carry the context information of the UE and/or the identification information of the UE.
  • An XnAP message can also be redefined. The structure of the message can be set based on the information it carries to reduce signaling overhead.
  • Step 102 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request (Bearer Context Setup Request) message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • Bearer Context Setup Request Bearer Context Setup Request
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE and NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for the UE may be a GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GPRS Tunneling Protocol, GTP) tunnel endpoint identifier (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier, TEID) and an IP address of the UPF.
  • GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol
  • TEID tunnel endpoint identifier
  • IP address of the UPF IP address
  • the tunnels between each network element such as IAB donor CP-UP and UPF, or the tunnel between IAB node DU and IAB donor CU-UP, are bidirectional, for example: the target IAB described in this article
  • the uplink GTP tunnel from the donor CP-UP to the UPF refers to the tunnel required by the target IAB donor CP-UP to send uplink data (uplink data refers to data from the UE) to the UPF.
  • uplink data refers to data from the UE
  • the downlink GTP tunnel from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP refers to the tunnel required by the UPF to send downlink data (downlink data refers to data sent to the UE) to the target IAB donor CP-UP.
  • Step 103 The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a bearer context setup response (Bearer Context Setup Response) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • bearer context setup response Bearer Context Setup Response
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the tunnel identification information, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish a downlink GTP tunnel from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish an uplink GTP tunnel from the handover IAB node DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish a forwarding tunnel from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE. .
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for switching the different bearers of the IAB node MT, which is used to establish the downlink GTP from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP for switching the different bearers of the IAB node MT tunnel.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, and is used to establish the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT from the target IAB donor DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP The uplink GTP tunnel.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, and is used to establish the transfer from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor for the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT.
  • CU-UP forwarding tunnel is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, and is used to establish the transfer from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor for the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT.
  • Step 104 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request (UE Context Setup Request) message to the target IAB donor DU.
  • UE Context Setup Request UE Context Setup Request
  • this message can be used to instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish a context for switching the IAB node MT.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP can use the UE Context Setup Request message to forward the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface from the target IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor DU for Instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish an uplink GTP tunnel from the target IAB donor DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP to switch different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the UE Context Setup Request message carries information related to switching IAB node MT.
  • switching IAB node MT is equivalent to UE. Therefore, as another possibility, UE The Context Setup Request message may also be called MT Context Setup Request, and its structure can refer to the UE Context Setup Request message in the prior art, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 105 The target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response (UE Context Setup Response) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • UE Context Setup Response UE Context Setup Response
  • the message can be used to indicate that the target IAB donor DU has successfully established a context for switching the IAB node MT.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the flow of handover preparation provided in an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 :
  • Step 201 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: context information of handover IAB node MT, identification information of handover IAB node MT, and context information of handover IAB node DU.
  • context information of handover IAB node MT the context information of switching IAB node MT, the identification information of switching IAB node MT, and the context information of switching IAB node DU can be found in step 101, which will not be repeated here.
  • the Handover Request message may be a Handover Request message defined in the existing 3GPP standard, or may be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
  • Step 202 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: context information of the UE and identification information of the UE.
  • context information of the UE and the identification information of the UE can be described in step 101, which will not be repeated here.
  • the XnAP message may be a Handover Request message defined in the existing 3GPP standard, or may be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
  • step 201 and step 202 is not limited.
  • Step 203 The target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Setup process corresponding to the UE.
  • the specific ones include:
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
  • Step 204 The target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Setup process corresponding to switching the IAB node MT.
  • the specific ones include:
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes, but is not limited to, the NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the different bearer of the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the difference between the switch IAB node MT
  • the identification information of the tunnel that bears the allocation on the F1 interface, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT.
  • step 203 and step 204 is not limited.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP in step 203 provides services for the UE
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP in step 204 provides services for handover IAB node MT
  • the target IAB donor in step 203 and step 204 CU-UP can be the same or different.
  • Step 205 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor DU.
  • this message can be used to instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish a context for switching the IAB node MT.
  • Step 206 The target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message can be used to indicate that the target IAB donor DU has successfully established a context for switching the IAB node MT.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic flow chart of the handover process provided in an embodiment of the application.
  • Step 301 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge (Handover Request Acknowledge) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Handover Request Acknowledge Handover Request Acknowledge
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, the configuration information of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the handover IAB
  • the different bearers of the node MT forward the tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface and switch the air interface configuration information of the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP can use the Handover Request Acknowledge message to forward the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-UP for the UE and the IAB node MT on the Xn interface to the source IAB donor CU- CP.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends different handover request confirmation messages to the source IAB donor CU-CP respectively.
  • the handover request confirmation message sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP contains at least one of the following information:
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE Identification information, UE configuration information.
  • the handover request confirmation message sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP contains at least one of the following information:
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP is used to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT allocated on the Xn interface Forward the tunnel identification information and switch the air interface configuration information of the IAB node MT.
  • the configuration information of the UE includes at least one of the following information: the new security algorithm, the Next Hop Chaining Count (NCC) value corresponding to the air interface key, and the packet data convergence protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) corresponding to different bearers of the UE. Data Convergence Protocol, PDCP) layer configuration, etc.
  • the configuration information of the UE may be carried in a radio resource control reconfiguration (Radio Resource Control Reconfiguration, RRC Reconfiguration) message, or other RRC messages. That is, the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages that carry UE configuration information are used as an RRC container and are carried in the handover request confirmation message.
  • RRC Reconfiguration Radio Resource Control Reconfiguration
  • the air interface configuration information of the switching IAB node MT includes at least one of the following information: the configuration of the PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer corresponding to different bearers of the switching IAB node MT, the configuration of the logical channel LCH, and the corresponding information of the new air interface key. NCC value, new security algorithm, etc.
  • the air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT can be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages. That is, the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages that carry the air interface configuration information of the handover IAB node MT are used as an RRC container and carried in the handover request confirmation message.
  • the Handover Request Acknowledge message may be the Handover Request Acknowledge message defined in the existing 3GPP standard.
  • the Handover Request Acknowledge message may also be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
  • Step 302 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request (UE Context Modification Request) message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • UE Context Modification Request UE Context Modification Request
  • the UE Context Modification Request message includes at least one of the following information: UE configuration information and Transmission Action Indicator IE, which is used to instruct the IAB node DU to stop data transmission with the UE. , And stop sending data to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • Step 303 The handover IAB node DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE, which carries the configuration information of the UE so that the UE can update according to the configuration of the target IAB donor CU-CP. That is, after receiving the RRCReconfiguration message, the UE can update the local configuration based on the new configuration included in it.
  • the host node that provides services for the UE also changes from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor.
  • the UE is always attached to the same cell where the IAB node DU is handed over before and after the handover of the IAB node, due to the change of the host node, the PDCP layer configuration or security algorithm or security key of the UE needs to be updated. This process can be called The UE configuration update or UE handover is not limited in this application.
  • Step 304 The handover IAB node DU sends a UE Context Modification Response (UE Context Modification Response) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • UE Context Modification Response UE Context Modification Response
  • Step 305 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request (Bearer Context Modification Request) message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • Bearer Context Modification Request Bearer Context Modification Request
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
  • Step 306 The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response (Bearer Context Modification Response) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Bearer Context Modification Response Bearer Context Modification Response
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE, for example: in the downlink direction, the count (COUNT) value allocated to the next PDCP service data unit (Service Data Unit, SDU) (
  • the COUNT value is composed of PDCP SN (Sequence Number) and HFN (Hyper Frame Number)), or the PDCP SN value assigned to the next PDCP SDU, and the first PDCP missing in the upstream direction
  • Step 307 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a sequence number status transfer (SN Status Transfer) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • SN Status Transfer sequence number status transfer
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP. That is to say, the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the status information of the PDCP corresponding to the different bearers of the UE received from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the SN Status Transfer message.
  • Step 308 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP, and the message includes the PDCP status information corresponding to different UEs on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • Step 309 The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • steps 305 to 309 can be understood as when the UE switches to the target IAB donor, but the source IAB donor CU-UP may still have the UE data, for example: it has been sent to the UE but the UE has not received it correctly. Feedback data, or data that has not yet been sent to the UE. Therefore, in order to ensure the lossless data reception of the UE, the source IAB donor CU-UP needs to forward these UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel, and the target IAB The donor CU-UP is further sent to the UE.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP can establish a GTP forwarding tunnel from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE in step 305, and then to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • UP forwards UE data.
  • Step 310 The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • the UE may validate the new configuration received in step 303 after sending the RRCReconfigurationComplete message. That is, based on the configuration used before step 303, the UE performs security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and sends it. In other words, the UE uses the security algorithm and key equivalent to the source IAB donor CU-CP to perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and then sends it to the handover IAB node DU, and the handover IAB node DU carries the received RRCReconfigurationComplete message as a container.
  • the F1AP message is sent to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP extracts the container from the F1AP message, and the container is carried in the XnAP message and sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the UE may perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message based on the new configuration received in step 303 and then send it, for example, using a new security algorithm and key to encrypt the RRCReconfigurationComplete message.
  • security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message based on the new configuration received in step 303 and then send it, for example, using a new security algorithm and key to encrypt the RRCReconfigurationComplete message.
  • method 1 after the handover IAB node DU receives the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, it can send the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP, as shown in steps 311 to 312 in the figure.
  • the protocol stack corresponding to the method is shown in Figure 9.
  • the message can be cached locally.
  • the switch IAB node DU can switch to the target IAB donor in the corresponding switch IAB node MT, and after the F1 interface is established between the switch IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP .
  • the protocol stack corresponding to this transmission mode is shown in figure 10.
  • step 310 may be performed directly after step 303.
  • the order of step 302 and step 305 is not limited, and is not limited in this application.
  • Step 311 Switch the IAB node DU to send an uplink RRC message transfer (UL RRC Message Transfer) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • UL RRC Message Transfer uplink RRC message transfer
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • Step 312 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in an XnAP message.
  • the XnAP message may be a newly defined XnAP message, or the XnAP message may be an existing XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
  • Step 313 The target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • path switch process may include:
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends the tunnel identification information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-UP on the NG interface to the UPF for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish the UPF to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE. Corresponding downlink GTP tunnel.
  • the UPF sends an End Marker packet to the source IAB donor CU-UP to notify the source IAB donor that the CU-UP is currently the last packet received from the UPF.
  • UPF sends new data to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the UPF may establish a downlink GTP tunnel corresponding to the target IAB donor CU-UP from the UPF to the target IAB donor CU-UP based on the different bearers of the UE, and send the new data of the UE to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the UE context release procedure may include:
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Release (UE Context Release) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to instruct the source IAB donor CU-CP to trigger the UE context deletion process.
  • UE Context Release UE Context Release
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Release Command message to the source IAB donor CU-UP to instruct the source IAB donor CU-UP to delete the context of the UE.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Release Complete message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to indicate that the source IAB donor CU-UP has successfully deleted the context of the UE.
  • Step 311' switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • Step 312' is the same as step 313, and will not be repeated here.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP After the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the configuration information of the UE to the UE, it can trigger the handover process of the IAB node MT. specific:
  • Step 314 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor DU.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: RRCReconfiguration message for handover IAB node MT.
  • the RRCReconfiguration message includes the new air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT, which is used to instruct the IAB node MT to switch to the target IAB donor, and to update the local configuration according to the new air interface configuration.
  • step 314 may be performed after 302, that is, after the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU, step 314 may be performed.
  • step 314 may be performed after 304, that is, after the source IAB donor CU-CP receives the UE Context Modification Response message sent by the handover IAB node DU, step 314 may be performed. This application is not limited.
  • Step 315 The source IAB donor DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the handover IAB node MT. After the handover IAB node MT receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it executes the handover process. That is: update the local configuration according to the received new air interface configuration, and initiate random access to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP may also send the PDCP status information of the switching IAB node MT to the target IAB donor CU-UP, which specifically includes steps 316 to 321:
  • Step 316 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT Different bearers establish GTP forwarding tunnels corresponding to the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • Step 317 The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: switch the status information of PDCP corresponding to different bearers of IAB node MT.
  • the PDCP status information is consistent with the description in step 306, and will not be repeated here.
  • Step 318 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
  • Step 319 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor UP, and the message includes the status information of the PDCP corresponding to the different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
  • Step 320 The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Step 321 The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the IAB node MT data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
  • Step 322 Switch the IAB node MT and send an RRC Reconfiguration Complete message to the target IAB donor DU.
  • Step 323 The target IAB donor DU sends a UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the message carries the RRC Reconfiguration Complete message received from the handover IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of switching the IAB node MT to the AMF, and triggers the context release process of switching the IAB node to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • step 302 the steps for handover of IAB node MT handover are similar to those during UE handover.
  • steps for handover of IAB node MT handover are similar to those during UE handover.
  • Step 325 Switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the switching IAB node MT notifies the switching IAB node DU through the internal interface, and it has successfully switched to the target IAB donor CU-CP, so as to trigger the switching IAB node DU to request the establishment process of the F1 interface from the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Operation 1 Switching the IAB node DU needs to obtain the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP can be sent to the handover IAB node DU through the source IAB donor CU-CP. For example, it is carried in the Handover Request Acknowledge message in step 301 and the UE Context Modification Request message in step 302. Or, it is carried in other messages in the handover preparation process, which is not limited in this application.
  • the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP can be sent to the switching IAB node MT through the source IAB donor CU-CP, and then the switching IAB node MT is sent to the switching IAB node through the internal interface DU.
  • the Handover Request Acknowledge message in step 301 the UE Context Modification Request message in step 314, and the RRCReconfiguration message in step 315.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP carries its IP address information in the RRC message and sends it to the switch IAB node MT, which is then sent to the switch IAB node MT through the internal interface Switch IAB node DU.
  • Operation 2 Switch the IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP to establish a Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) association.
  • SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol
  • Operation 3 Switch IAB node DU to obtain new configuration information.
  • the new configuration information of the handover IAB node DU includes but is not limited to: the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU. Among them, there may be multiple serving cells for switching the IAB node DU, and the new configuration information contains multiple CGIs, and different cells correspond to different CGIs.
  • the target IAB donor After switching the IAB node DU to the target IAB donor, the target IAB donor obtains the new configuration information from the OAM server, or the switching IAB node DU can also obtain the new configuration information in other ways, and this application does not restrict it.
  • the handover IAB node DU After obtaining the new configuration information, the handover IAB node DU sends the first indication information to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the first indication information includes the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of the at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU.
  • the first indication information may also include information indicating whether at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU is activated, so that the target IAB donor CU-CP learns which of the cells served by the handover IAB node DU have been activated.
  • the first indication information may be carried in an F1 interface setup request message (F1Setup Request) or other F1AP messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the indication information indicating whether at least one cell served by the IAB node DU is activated may be a displayed indication or an implicit indication. If it is an implicit instruction, as another example, after acquiring the new configuration information, switch the IAB node DU to send the first instruction information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the first instruction information includes the switch IAB node DU service The new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one activated cell, and/or the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one inactive cell served by the IAB node DU.
  • the handover IAB node DU obtains the new configuration information from the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP needs to send the context information of the handover IAB node DU to the target IAB donor CU-CP during the handover preparation process.
  • the context information of switching the IAB node DU has been described in step 101, and will not be repeated here.
  • the new configuration information includes a new cell global identity CGI for switching at least one cell served by the IAB node DU.
  • the handover IAB node DU sends first indication information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, where the first indication information includes the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of the at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU.
  • switching the IAB node DU to obtain new configuration information from the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP may also include switching the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one cell served by the IAB node DU.
  • Step 326 UE's context establishment process.
  • switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP, which will cause the switching IAB node DU to delete the UE's application layer context on the F1 interface. For example: switching IAB node DU to delete the F1AP ID of the UE on the F1 interface, and/or switching IAB node DU to delete the GTP tunnel of the per UE bearer allocated on the F1 interface, etc. Therefore, once the F1 interface is established between the handover IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the target IAB donor CU-CP needs to switch to the IAB node DU to trigger the context establishment process of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP obtains the identity of the UE from the source IAB donor CU-CP, that is, the old CGI and C-RNTI.
  • the old CGI is the identifier of the cell served by the handover IAB node DU to which the UE is attached.
  • the cell served by the handover IAB node DU belongs to the source IAB donor.
  • C-RNTI is the identifier assigned to the UE by the cell served by the IAB node DU to which the UE is attached.
  • the handover IAB node DU obtains the new configuration information, and the identity of the cell served by the handover IAB node DU to which the UE is attached is updated from the old CGI to the new CGI. At the same time, the UE’s identity is updated from the old CGI and C-RNTI Update to new CGI and C-RNTI. Then, the handover IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP (that is, step 325), the handover IAB node DU sends the cell identification change information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the change information includes the handover IAB node DU Old CGI and corresponding new CGI of all cells. The target IAB donor CU-CP updates the cached UE identification information according to the received information, that is, updates the old CGI and C-RNTI to the new CGI and C-RNTI.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP carries the updated UE identification information (new CGI+C-RNTI) in the UE Context Setup Request message and sends it to the handover IAB node DU.
  • the handover IAB node DU can identify the UE attached to it according to the received new CGI and C-RNTI information.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the handover IAB node DU, and the UE Context Setup Request message carries the identification information of the UE (old CGI and C-RNTI).
  • Switch IAB node DU to identify the UE according to the UE's identification information, and update the UE's identification according to the new configuration information obtained, for example: update the old CGI and C-RNTI to the new CGI and C-RNTI, and update the UE identification (New CGI and C-RNTI) are carried in the UE Context Setup Response message and sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the target IAB donor CU-CP updates the identification information of the UE according to the received message.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP serving the UE and the source IAB donor CU-UP serving the handover IAB node MT may be the same or different.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP serving the UE and the target IAB donor CU-UP serving the handover IAB node MT may also be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
  • the identification information of the UE can be in the form of CGI and C-RNTI, and the identification information of the F1 interface (which can be referred to as UE F1AP ID) can also be allocated to the UE through the IAB donor CU-CP. Identify the UE.
  • the identifier of the F1 interface assigned by the IAB donor CU-CP to the UE is unique on the IAB donor CU-CP, and the IAB donor CU-CP can identify the corresponding UE based on the UE F1AP ID.
  • the pre-handover preparation process is similar to that in Figure 6 or Figure 7, except that the source IAB donor CU-CP does not need to send to the target IAB donor CU-CP UE's identification information (CGI and C-RNTI).
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends the UE F1AP ID allocated to the UE to the handover IAB node DU through the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the UE F1AP ID can be carried in any message in the handover preparation process, which is not limited in this application.
  • the handover IAB node MT sends the F1AP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the RRCReconfigurationComplete message of the UE and the F1 tunnel identification information (UE F1AP ID) allocated by the target IAB donor CU-CP for the UE. That is, the handover IAB node MT forwards the UE's RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the F1AP message.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP can identify which UE it is based on the received UE F1AP ID, and match it with the UE context obtained from the source IAB donor CU-CP during the handover preparation process.
  • this identification method (that is, the identification information of the F1 interface is used to identify the UE) can also be applied to the embodiments of Scheme 2 and Scheme 3. In order to avoid repetitive description, it will not be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a handover method provided in an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 :
  • Step 401 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: UE context and UE identification information.
  • This message can be used to inform the target IAB donor CU-CP that it is ready to handover the UE attached to the handover IAB node DU cell to the target IAB donor.
  • step 101 please refer to step 101, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 402 Bearer Context Setup process.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
  • step 102 and step 103 which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 404 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, and configuration information of the UE.
  • the configuration information of the UE may be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages.
  • step 301 For other details, refer to step 301, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 405 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • the UE Context Modification Request message includes at least one of the following information: UE configuration information and transmission action indicator information (Transmission Action Indicator IE).
  • step 302 For other details, refer to step 302, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 406 The handover IAB node DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE, which carries the configuration information of the UE, so that the UE can update according to the configuration of the target IAB donor CU-CP. That is, after the UE receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it can update the local configuration based on the new configuration included in it.
  • Step 407 Switch the IAB node DU and send the UE Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Step 408 Execute the Bearer Context Modification process.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE.
  • step 304 please refer to step 306, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 409 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • step 307 For other details, refer to step 307, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 410 the target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Modification process.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to the PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • step 308 to step 309 please refer to step 308 to step 309, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 411 The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
  • Step 412 The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • the UE uses the security algorithm and key equivalent to the source IAB donor CU-CP to securely process the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, and then sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the security algorithm and key equivalent to the source IAB donor CU-CP to securely process the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, and then sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the UE may perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message based on the received new configuration, for example, use a new security algorithm and key to encrypt the RRCReconfigurationComplete message.
  • the handover IAB node DU can send the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP, as shown in step 413 in the figure. ⁇ As shown in step 415.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be cached locally.
  • the switch IAB node DU can switch to the target IAB donor in the corresponding switch IAB node MT, and after the F1 interface is established between the switch IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP . As shown in step 413' to step 414' in the figure.
  • Step 413 Switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • Step 414 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in an XnAP message.
  • Step 415 the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • step 3144 For specific details, refer to step 314, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 413' the handover IAB node DU sends a UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
  • Step 414' the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF.
  • step 312 to step 314, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 416 Perform the process of switching the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a handover request message (Handover Request) to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the handover request message includes at least one of the following: context information for switching IAB node MT, identification information for switching IAB node MT, and context information for switching IAB node DU.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by UPF to switch different bearers of IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT different bearer
  • the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor DU.
  • the target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the switch IAB node MT, and the air interface configuration information of the switch IAB node MT.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor DU.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: RRCReconfiguration message for handover IAB node MT.
  • the RRCReconfiguration message includes the new air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT, which is used to instruct the IAB node MT to switch to the target IAB donor, and to update the local configuration according to the new air interface configuration.
  • the source IAB donor DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the handover IAB node MT.
  • the handover IAB node MT After the handover IAB node MT receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it executes the handover process. That is: update the local configuration according to the received new air interface configuration, and initiate random access to the target IAB donor.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT
  • Different bearers establish GTP forwarding tunnels corresponding to the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • step 7 and step 9 can be executed in parallel, and the order is not limited.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: switch the status information of PDCP corresponding to different bearers of IAB node MT.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor UP, which includes the status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the IAB node MT data through the forwarding tunnel to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the handover IAB node MT sends an RRC Reconfiguration Complete message to the target IAB donor DU.
  • the target IAB donor DU sends the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP, which carries the RRC Reconfiguration Complete message received from the handover IAB node MT.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of switching IAB node MT to AMF, and triggers the context release process of switching IAB node to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Step 417 Switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • step 325 For specific details, refer to step 325, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 418 the UE's context establishment process.
  • step 326 please refer to step 326, which will not be repeated here.
  • the difference between the second solution and the first solution is that: in this solution, the UE performs handover first, and then switches the IAB node before performing the handover.
  • the UE and the handover IAB node perform the handover preparation process in parallel. After the handover IAB node sends the configuration information of the UE to the UE, the handover of the handover IAB node MT is performed.
  • the source IAB donor switches the handover IAB node MT to the target IAB donor, and then switches the UE attached to the handover IAB node DU cell to the target IAB donor.
  • the switching process of switching IAB node MT can refer to the above, and it will not be repeated here.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP can obtain the services of the switching IAB node DU.
  • the new cell identity (new CGI) and the corresponding old cell identity (old CGI) of at least one cell can be obtained by referring to Scheme 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP instructs the source IAB donor CU-CP to switch the identity change information of the cell served by the IAB node DU, and the information includes the CGI before and after the cell update (the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI).
  • the cell identity change information may be carried in a node configuration update (NG-RAN Node Configuration Update) message and sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • NG-RAN Node Configuration Update node configuration update
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP can update the identification information of the UE, that is, update the identification information (old CGI and C-RNTI) of the UE to (new CGI and C-RNTI).
  • the UE executes the handover procedure, specifically:
  • FIG. 12 which exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a UE handover method, in FIG. 12:
  • Step 501 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: identification information (new CGI and C-RNTI) of the UE and context information of the UE.
  • identification information new CGI and C-RNTI
  • context information of the UE.
  • Step 502 Bearer Context Setup process.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE.
  • the tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
  • step 102 and step 103 which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 503 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
  • Step 504 Execute the Bearer Context Modification process.
  • the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
  • the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE.
  • step 304 please refer to step 306, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 505 The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • step 307 For other details, refer to step 307, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 506 the target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Modification process.
  • the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the message includes but is not limited to the PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
  • the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • step 308 to step 309 please refer to step 308 to step 309, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 507 The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
  • Step 508 Context establishment process of the UE.
  • step 326 please refer to step 326, which will not be repeated here.
  • Step 509 The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • the UE Context Modification Request message includes new configuration information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-CP for the UE, and the new configuration information may be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message.
  • Step 510 Switch the IAB node DU to send an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE.
  • the configuration information used by the UE is always allocated by the source IAB donor CU-CP, that is, the UE will only use the source IAB donor CU-CP
  • the configured security algorithm and key perform security processing on sent/received RRC messages. Therefore, in order for the UE to safely parse the RRCReconfiguration message generated by the target IAB donor CU-CP, the target IAB donor CU-CP needs to use the security algorithm and key used by the source IAB donor CU-CP to securely process the message and send it. . That is, in step 601, the source IAB donor CU-CP also needs to send the security algorithm and key used by it to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • Step 511 The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
  • Step 512 Switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the UL RRC Message Transfer message carries the RRCReconfigurationComplete message.
  • Step 513 The target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
  • the handover process of switching between an IAB node and other IAB nodes attached to it and UEs attached to other IAB nodes may include: in the handover preparation process, the source IAB donor to the target
  • the IAB donor sends topology information, where the topology information is used to describe the parent-child relationship between neighboring nodes, that is, the topology information can be used to instruct to switch the parent-child relationship between the IAB donor and the child nodes directly attached to it.
  • the topology information includes the parent-child relationship between switching IAB node and IAB node A, and the parent-child relationship between IAB node A and UE.
  • the topology information includes the parent-child relationship between switching IAB node and IAB node A, the parent-child relationship between IAB node A and IAB node B, and the parent-child relationship between IAB node B and UE.
  • the topology information can be carried in the Handover Request and sent to the target IAB donor together with the context information of the UE, the context information of other IAB nodes, and/or the context information of the handover IAB node.
  • the handover process of switching between an IAB node and other IAB nodes attached to it and UEs attached to other IAB nodes may also include: in the handover preparation process, the source IAB node to the target IAB donor Send at least one of the following information: UE context information, UE identification information, handover IAB node MT context information, handover IAB node MT identification information, handover IAB node DU context information, other IAB node MT context information, others IAB node MT identification information, other IAB node DU context information.
  • the context information of the UE, the identification information of the UE, the context information of the handover IAB node MT, the identity information of the handover IAB node MT, and the context information of the handover IAB node DU are described in step 101 of the scheme 1, and will not be repeated here.
  • the context information of other IAB node MT is similar to the context information of handover IAB node MT
  • the identification information of other IAB node MT is similar to the identification information of handover IAB node MT
  • the context information of other IAB node DU is similar to handover.
  • the context information of IAB node DU will not be repeated here.
  • Solution 1, Solution 2, or Solution 3 which will not be repeated here.
  • IAB donor and IAB node include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiment of the present application may divide the IAB donor and the IAB node into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the source IAB donor 100 involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the source IAB donor 100 may include: a receiving module 101, a determining module 102, and a sending module 103 .
  • the receiving module 101 can be used for the step of "acquiring signal quality information".
  • this module can be used for supporting the source IAB donor to execute step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 501 in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the determining module 102 can be used to "determine the step of switching the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result".
  • this module can be used to support the source IAB donor to perform step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 401 in the above method embodiment.
  • the sending module 103 can be used for the step of "sending the context of the IAB node and the context of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor".
  • this module can be used to support the source IAB donor to perform step 101 in the above method embodiment, Step 202, step 401, and step 501.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the IAB node 200 involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the IAB node 200 may include: a sending module 201 and a receiving module 202.
  • the sending module 201 can be used for the step of “sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor”.
  • this module can be used for supporting the IAB node to execute step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 501 in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the receiving module 202 may be used for the step of "receiving the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the source IAB donor and the second configuration information required for the at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor", For example, this module can be used to support the IAB node to execute step 302, step 315, step 405, step 416, step 503, and step 509 in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the sending module 201 may also be used to “send the second configuration information to at least one child node”. For example, the module may be used to support the IAB node to perform step 303, step 406, and step 510 in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the device includes a processing module 301 and a communication module 302.
  • the device further includes a storage module 303.
  • the processing module 301, the communication module 302, and the storage module 303 are connected by a communication bus.
  • the communication module 302 may be a device with a transceiving function, and is used to communicate with other network equipment or a communication network.
  • the storage module 303 may include one or more memories, and the memories may be devices for storing programs or data in one or more devices or circuits.
  • the storage module 303 can exist independently and is connected to the processing module 301 through a communication bus.
  • the storage module can also be integrated with the processing module 301.
  • the apparatus 300 can be used in a network device, a circuit, a hardware component, or a chip.
  • the device 300 may be an IAB node in the embodiment of the present application, for example, switching IAB node.
  • the communication module 302 of the device 300 may include an antenna and a transceiver of an IAB node.
  • the communication module 302 may also include an output device and an input device.
  • the device 300 may be a chip in the IAB node in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication module 302 may be an input or output interface, pin or circuit, or the like.
  • the storage module may store a computer-executed instruction of the method on the IAB node side, so that the processing module 301 executes the method on the IAB node side in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the storage module 303 can be a register, a cache or RAM, etc.
  • the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301; the storage module 303 can be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301.
  • the processing module 301 is independent.
  • the transceiver may be integrated on the device 300, for example, the communication module 302 integrates the transceiver 202.
  • the device 300 When the device 300 is the IAB node or the chip in the IAB node in the embodiment of the present application, the device 300 can implement the method for switching the execution of the IAB node in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the device 300 may be the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application, for example, the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor.
  • the communication module 302 of the device 300 may include an antenna and a transceiver of an IAB donor.
  • the communication module 302 may also include a network interface of the IAB donor.
  • the device 300 may be a chip in the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication module 302 may be an input or output interface, pin or circuit, or the like.
  • the storage module may store a computer-executed instruction of the method on the source IAB donor side, so that the processing module 301 executes the method on the source IAB donor side in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the storage module 303 can be a register, a cache or RAM, etc.
  • the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301; the storage module 303 can be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301.
  • the processing module 301 is independent.
  • the transceiver may be integrated on the device 300, for example, the communication module 302 integrates the transceiver 103 and the network interface 104.
  • the device 500 is the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application or the chip in the IAB donor, the method executed by the IAB donor in the foregoing embodiment can be implemented.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by IAB node to control
  • the IAB node is used to implement the above method embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by the IAB donor to control
  • the IAB donor is used to implement the above method embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which is used to implement the foregoing method embodiment when the computer program is executed by the IAB node.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the above method embodiment when the computer program is executed by the IAB donor.
  • the program may be stored in whole or in part on a storage medium packaged with the processor, and may also be stored in part or in a memory not packaged with the processor.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a processor, which is configured to implement the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a chip.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in combination with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), and erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • ROM read-only memory
  • EPROM Erasable Programmable ROM
  • EPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
  • registers hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and can write information to the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium may be located in the ASIC.
  • the ASIC can be located in a network device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the network device.
  • the functions described in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, these functions can be stored in a computer-readable medium or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on the computer-readable medium.
  • the computer-readable medium includes a computer storage medium and a communication medium, where the communication medium includes any medium that facilitates the transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to the field of communications. Provided in embodiments of the present invention are a switching method and device. The method comprises: receiving a measurement result reported by an IAB node, the measurement result comprising at least one of a signal measurement result of a source cell and a signal measurement result of a target cell, wherein the source cell belongs to a source IAB donor, and the target cell belongs to a target IAB donor; and if it is determined, on the basis of the measurement result, that the IAB node is to be switched to the target IAB donor, sending, to the target IAB donor, context of the IAB node and context of one or more subnodes of the IAB node, wherein the one or more subnodes of the IAB node include a user equipment unit (UE) and/or other IAB nodes. The invention provides a switching solution applicable to a scenario of a mobile IAB node.

Description

切换方法及装置Switching method and device 技术领域Technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及一种切换方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular, to a handover method and device.
背景技术Background technique
已有技术中,用户设备(User Equipment,UE)可通过附着在接入回传一体化(Integrated Access and Backhaul,IAB)节点(node),以接入IAB宿主(donor)。通常情况下,由于IAB node为固定节点(不可移动),因此,已有技术的切换只需考虑UE在源IAB donor与目标IAB donor之间的切换。In the prior art, user equipment (User Equipment, UE) can be attached to an Integrated Access and Backhaul (IAB) node (node) to access an IAB donor (donor). Generally, since the IAB node is a fixed node (not movable), the handover in the prior art only needs to consider the handover of the UE between the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor.
然而,随着移动技术的发展,IAB node可设置于火车、汽车、无人机等可移动应用场景,针对该场景,可将IAB node和其子节点(例如:UE或者其他IAB node)作为一个整体(例如:群组)一起移动,但目前尚未提出一种完善的切换方案。However, with the development of mobile technology, IAB node can be set in mobile application scenarios such as trains, cars, drones, etc. For this scenario, IAB node and its child nodes (such as UE or other IAB nodes) can be used as one The whole (for example: group) moves together, but a perfect handover scheme has not yet been proposed.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种切换方法及装置,从而提供一种完善的切换方案,提升应用场景的多样性。The present application provides a switching method and device, so as to provide a complete switching solution and improve the diversity of application scenarios.
为达到上述目的,本申请采用如下技术方案:In order to achieve the above objectives, this application adopts the following technical solutions:
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种切换方法,该方法可应用于源IAB donor,方法可以包括:源IAB donor接收IAB节点上报的测量结果,测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,源小区属于源IAB donor,目标小区属于目标IAB donor。接着,源IAB donor基于IAB节点上报的测量结果,确定将IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor的情况下,可向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息。其中,IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点。In the first aspect, the embodiments of this application provide a handover method, which can be applied to a source IAB donor. The method may include: the source IAB donor receives the measurement result reported by the IAB node, and the measurement result includes the signal measurement result of the source cell and the target At least one of the signal measurement results of the cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell belongs to the target IAB donor. Then, the source IAB donor determines to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result reported by the IAB node, and can send the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor. Wherein, at least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
基于上述方式,源IAB donor可基于IAB节点上报的测量结果,获取到IAB节点与源IAB donor之间和/或IAB节点与目标IAB donor节点之间的信号状态,从而判断出是否需要将IAB节点及附着于其下的IAB的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor上。并且,源IAB donor在确定将IAB节点及其至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor后,可将本地缓存的IAB节点的上下文信息,以及至少一个子节点的上下文信息发送给目标IAB donor,以使目标IAB donor为IAB节点及其至少一个子节点的切换做准备,以实现IAB节点及附着于其下的至少一个子节点从源IAB donor到目标IAB donor的切换。并且,本申请可应用于移动IAB节点的场景,即,在IAB节点移动且需要切换IAB donor的场景下,可实现IAB节点及其下附着的至少一个子节点的群体切换。可选的,本申请还可应用于固定IAB节点的切换场景,例如:IAB节点部署在源IAB donor和目标IAB donor覆盖的交叠区,这样在IAB节点需要切换IAB donor时,同样也可实现IAB节点及其下附着的至少一个子节点的群体切换。也就是说,只要IAB节点及其下附着的至少一个子节点执行群体切换都适用于本申请的方案,本申请不做限制。Based on the above method, the source IAB donor can obtain the signal status between the IAB node and the source IAB donor and/or between the IAB node and the target IAB donor node based on the measurement results reported by the IAB node, so as to determine whether the IAB node needs to be And at least one child node of the IAB attached to it switches to the target IAB donor. Moreover, after the source IAB donor determines to switch the IAB node and its at least one child node to the target IAB donor, it can send the context information of the locally cached IAB node and the context information of at least one child node to the target IAB donor, so that The target IAB donor prepares for the handover of the IAB node and at least one child node, so as to realize the handover of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor. In addition, the present application can be applied to the scenario of moving the IAB node, that is, in the scenario where the IAB node is moving and the IAB donor needs to be switched, the group switching of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it can be realized. Optionally, this application can also be applied to the handover scenarios of fixed IAB nodes. For example, the IAB node is deployed in the overlapping area covered by the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor. This can also be achieved when the IAB node needs to switch the IAB donor. Group switching of the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it. That is to say, as long as the IAB node and at least one child node attached to it perform group switching, it is applicable to the solution of this application, and this application is not limited.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还可以包括:源IAB donor接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息,以及IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;并且,源IAB donor向IAB节点的至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息,以及,向IAB节点发送第一配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method may further include: the source IAB donor receives the first configuration information sent by the target IAB donor that the IAB node needs to switch to the target IAB donor, and at least one child node of the IAB node switches to the target IAB The second configuration information required by the donor; and, the source IAB donor sends the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sends the first configuration information to the IAB node.
基于上述方式,目标IAB donor可基于接收到的源IAB donor发送的IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,为IAB节点和IAB节点的至少一个子节点做好切换准备,例如,向IAB节点发送其切换到目标IABdonor所需的第一配置信息,以及向IAB节点的至少一个子节点发送其切换到目标IABdonor所需的第二配置信息,以通过源IAB donor将第二配置信息和第一配置信息分别发送给IAB节点的至少一个子节点和IAB节点。Based on the above method, the target IAB donor can prepare the switch between the IAB node and the at least one child node of the IAB node based on the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node received from the source IAB donor. For example, sending the first configuration information required for switching to the target IABdonor to the IAB node, and sending the second configuration information required for switching to the target IABdonor to at least one child node of the IAB node, so as to transfer the second configuration information to the source IAB donor. The configuration information and the first configuration information are respectively sent to at least one child node of the IAB node and the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,第二配置信息包括以下至少之一:与目标IAB donor对等的UE的PDCP层的配置信息、UE和目标IAB donor之间使用的安全算法、UE和目标IAB donor之间使用的安全密钥对应的NCC值。In a possible implementation manner, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the second configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE peering with the target IAB donor, the UE and the target IAB donor The security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor and the NCC value corresponding to the security key used between the UE and the target IAB donor.
基于上述方式,作为IAB节点的子节点的UE,在切换到目标IAB donor后,可基于第二配置信息与目标IAB donor进行通信。Based on the above method, the UE, which is a child node of the IAB node, can communicate with the target IAB donor based on the second configuration information after switching to the target IAB donor.
在一种可能的实现方式中,其中,IAB节点的上下文信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中;或者,IAB节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中,IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在n个第二消息中,n个第二消息与至少一个子节点一一对应,n等于至少一个子节点的个数。In a possible implementation manner, the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message; or the context information of the IAB node is carried in the first message, and the IAB node The context information of at least one child node of is carried in n second messages, the n second messages correspond to at least one child node one-to-one, and n is equal to the number of at least one child node.
基于上述方式,源IAB donor向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和至少一个子节点的上下文信息的方式可以分为两种,一种是IAB节点的上下文信息和至少一个子节点的上下文信息均携带在第一消息中。可选地,第一消息可以是3GPP中的切换请求消息,也可以是新定义的XnAP消息。另一种是IAB节点的上下文信息与至少一个子节点的上下文信息分别携带在不同的消息中。Based on the above method, the source IAB donor can send the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node to the target IAB donor in two ways. One is the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node. Carried in the first message. Optionally, the first message may be a handover request message in 3GPP, or a newly defined XnAP message. The other is that the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node are carried in different messages.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,还包括:向目标IAB donor发送UE的标识信息;标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的小区所使用的小区全球标识CGI,以及,UE在IAB节点的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI。In a possible implementation manner, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, sending context information of the IAB node and context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor also includes: sending to the target IAB donor The identification information of the UE; the identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification C-RNTI of the UE in the cell of the IAB node.
基于上述方式,如果IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,对于UE的切换,源IAB donor向目标IAB donor发送UE的上下文信息的同时,还需要向目标IAB donor发送UE的标识信息,以使目标IAB donor将UE的上下文信息与UE的标识信息进行匹配或关联。Based on the above method, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes the UE, for the UE handover, the source IAB donor sends the context information of the UE to the target IAB donor, and also needs to send the UE identification information to the target IAB donor, so that the target The IAB donor matches or associates the context information of the UE with the identification information of the UE.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括其它IAB节点,其它IAB节点的上下文信息包括其它IAB节点的分布式单元DU的上下文信息;DU的上下文信息包括以下至少之一:DU的标识信息、DU服务的至少一个小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少 一个小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本、DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes other IAB nodes, the context information of the other IAB nodes includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB nodes; the context information of the DU includes at least one of the following : DU identification information, identification CGI of at least one cell served by DU, physical cell identification PCI of at least one cell served by DU, RRC version supported by DU, and indication information of whether at least one cell served by DU is activated.
基于上述方式,如果IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括其它IAB节点,对于其它IAB节点的切换,源IAB donor可向目标IAB donor发送其它IAB节点的DU的标识信息和DU服务的至少一个小区的是否被激活的指示信息等。也就是说,DU服务的至少一个小区中可能存在未激活的小区,目标IAB donor可基于该指示信息,确定DU服务的至少一个小区中哪些是被激活的小区。Based on the above method, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes other IAB nodes, for the handover of other IAB nodes, the source IAB donor can send to the target IAB donor the identification information of the DU of the other IAB node and the status of at least one cell served by the DU. Instruction information to be activated, etc. In other words, there may be inactive cells in at least one cell served by the DU, and the target IAB donor may determine which of the at least one cell served by the DU is an activated cell based on the indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,还包括:向目标IAB donor发送拓扑信息,拓扑信息用于指示IAB节点与IAB节点的至少一个子节点之间和/或IAB节点的多个子节点之间的拓扑关系。In a possible implementation manner, sending the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor also includes: sending the topology information to the target IAB donor, and the topology information is used to indicate that the IAB node and the The topological relationship between at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
基于上述方式,本申请可实现多跳场景下的IAB节点与IAB节点的至少一个子节点的切换。Based on the above method, the present application can realize the handover between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node in a multi-hop scenario.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还可以包括:源IAB donor接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;向IAB节点发送IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;或者,源IAB donor接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;向IAB节点发送IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识。其中,新小区全球标识为IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;旧小区全球标识为IAB节点接入源IAB donor使用的是小区全球标识。In a possible implementation, the method may further include: the source IAB donor receives the new cell global identity and the old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor; and sends the IAB node’s global identity to the IAB node The global identity of the new cell and the global identity of the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU; or, the source IAB donor receives the global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor; and sends the IAB node’s global identity to the IAB node The global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU. Among them, the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the old cell global identifier is the IAB node access source IAB donor using the cell global identifier.
基于上述方式,IAB节点可获取到目标IAB donor为IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区分配的新小区全球标识,以使IAB节点更新本地的旧小区全球标识。Based on the above method, the IAB node can obtain the global identity of the new cell allocated by the target IAB donor for at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node, so that the IAB node can update the local global identity of the old cell.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种切换方法,该方法应用于接入回转一体化IAB节点,方法包括:IAB节点向源IAB donor发送测量结果;以及,IAB节点可接收源IAB donor发送的IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点;接着,IAB节点向至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息。In the second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a handover method, which is applied to access a turn-integrated IAB node. The method includes: the IAB node sends a measurement result to the source IAB donor; and the IAB node can receive the source IAB donor. The first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor and the second configuration information required for at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; at least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or Other IAB nodes; then, the IAB node sends second configuration information to at least one child node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:获取IAB node的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识CGI;其中,新小区全球标识为IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;IAB节点接入源IAB donor使用的是旧小区全球标识。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: obtaining the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; where the new cell global identity is the cell global identity used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; The IAB node access source IAB donor uses the global identity of the old cell.
基于上述方式,实现了IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的旧标识信息,即,旧小区全球标识CGI的更新,以使IAB节点可基于新CGI,更新至少一个子节点的标识信息。Based on the above method, the old identification information of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node, that is, the update of the global identification CGI of the old cell, is implemented, so that the IAB node can update the identification information of at least one child node based on the new CGI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,方法还包括:向目标IAB donor发送指示消息,指示消息包括DU服务的至少一个小区的旧小区全球标识和新小区全球标识。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: sending an indication message to the target IAB donor, where the indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
基于上述方式,IAB节点在切换到目标IAB donor,可向目标IAB donor指示旧小区全球标识和新小区全球标识,以使目标IAB donor获知IAB节点的新小区全球标识,并更新本地缓存的UE的标识,即由UE接入的IAB节点的旧CGI和C-RNTI更新为新CGI和C-RNTI。Based on the above method, when the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, it can indicate the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity to the target IAB donor, so that the target IAB donor can learn the global identity of the new cell of the IAB node and update the locally cached UE’s The identifier, that is, the old CGI and C-RNTI of the IAB node accessed by the UE are updated to the new CGI and C-RNTI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,指示消息还包括DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner, the indication message also includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若至少一个子节点包括UE,方法还包括:IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor,并接收目标IAB donor发送的UE的标识信息;其中,UE的标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的DU服务的小区的旧小区全球标识和UE在DU服务的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI;或者,UE的标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的DU服务的小区的新小区全球标识和UE在DU服务的小区中的C-RNTI。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node includes a UE, the method further includes: the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the identification information of the UE sent by the target IAB donor; wherein the identification information of the UE includes the UE access The old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU; or, the identification information of the UE includes the new cell of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node. The global identity of the cell and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
基于上述方式,IAB节点与目标IAB donor可统一UE的标识信息,即均将UE的标识信息更新为新标识信息,新标识信息包括新CGI和C-RNTI,以使IAB节点与目标IAB donor可基于UE的新标识信息,识别到对应的UE,并为UE建立承载。Based on the above method, the IAB node and the target IAB donor can unify the UE’s identification information, that is, both update the UE’s identification information to new identification information. The new identification information includes the new CGI and C-RNTI, so that the IAB node and the target IAB donor can be Based on the new identification information of the UE, the corresponding UE is identified and a bearer is established for the UE.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若至少一个子节点包括UE,IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor之前,方法还包括:接收源IAB donor发送的目标IAB donor为UE分配的F1接口的标识,F1接口为IAB node和目标IAB donor之间的接口。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node includes the UE, before the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, the method further includes: receiving the F1 interface identifier of the target IAB donor assigned to the UE by the source IAB donor, and the F1 interface It is the interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
基于上述方式,IAB节点与目标IAB donor还可以通过F1接口的标识识别对应的UE,以为UE建立对应的承载。Based on the above method, the IAB node and the target IAB donor can also identify the corresponding UE through the identifier of the F1 interface, so as to establish a corresponding bearer for the UE.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种切换装置,该装置可应用于源IAB donor,装置包括:存储器和处理器,存储器和处理器耦合,存储器存储有程序指令,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:接收IAB节点上报的测量结果,测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,源小区属于源IAB donor,目标小区属于目标IAB donor;基于测量结果,确定将IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor,则向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息;其中,IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点。In the third aspect, the embodiments of the present application provide a switching device, which can be applied to a source IAB donor. The device includes: a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled, the memory stores program instructions, and the program instructions are executed by the processor At this time, the handover device is caused to perform the following steps: receive the measurement result reported by the IAB node, the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell Belongs to the target IAB donor; based on the measurement result, it is determined to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor, then the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor; among them, at least one child of the IAB node The nodes include user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息,以及IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;向IAB节点的至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息,以及,向IAB节点发送第一配置信息。In a possible implementation manner, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps: receiving the first configuration information required by the IAB node from the target IAB donor to switch to the target IAB donor, and at least the IAB node The second configuration information required for a child node to switch to the target IAB donor; sending the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sending the first configuration information to the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,第二配置信息包括以下至少之一:与目标IAB donor对等的UE的PDCP层的配置信息、UE和目标IAB donor之间使用的安全算法、UE和目标IAB donor之间使用的安全密钥对应的NCC值。In a possible implementation manner, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the second configuration information includes at least one of the following: configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE peering with the target IAB donor, the UE and the target IAB donor The security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor and the NCC value corresponding to the security key used between the UE and the target IAB donor.
在一种可能的实现方式中,IAB节点的上下文信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中;或者,IAB节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中,IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在n个第二消息中,n个第二消息与至少一个子节点一一对应,n等于至少一个子节点的个数。In a possible implementation manner, the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message; or, the context information of the IAB node is carried in the first message, and at least the context information of the IAB node The context information of a child node is carried in n second messages, the n second messages correspond to at least one child node one-to-one, and n is equal to the number of at least one child node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:向目标IAB donor发送UE的标识信息;标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的小区所使用的小区全球标识CGI,以及,UE在IAB节点的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor. When the program instructions are executed by the processor, Make the handover device perform the following steps: send the identification information of the UE to the target IAB donor; the identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification of the UE in the cell of the IAB node C-RNTI.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括其它IAB节点,其它IAB节点的上下文信息包括其它IAB节点的分布式单元DU的上下文信息;DU的上下文信息包括以下至少之一:DU的标识信息、DU服务的至少一个小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本、DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node of the IAB node includes other IAB nodes, the context information of the other IAB nodes includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB nodes; the context information of the DU includes at least one of the following : DU identification information, identification CGI of at least one cell served by DU, physical cell identification PCI of at least one cell served by DU, RRC version supported by DU, and indication information of whether at least one cell served by DU is activated.
在一种可能的实现方式中,向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:向目标IAB donor发送拓扑信息,拓扑信息用于指示IAB节点与IAB节点的至少一个子节点之间和/或IAB节点的多个子节点之间的拓扑关系。In a possible implementation manner, the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor. When the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps: Send topology information, where the topology information is used to indicate the topological relationship between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:源IAB donor接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;向IAB节点发送IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;或者,源IAB donor接收目标IAB donor发送的IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;向IAB节点发送IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识。其中,新小区全球标识为IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;旧小区全球标识为IAB节点接入源IAB donor使用的是小区全球标识。In a possible implementation manner, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the handover device executes the following steps: the source IAB donor receives the new cell global identity and the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor Global ID; send to the IAB node the global ID of the new cell and the global ID of the old cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; or, the source IAB donor receives the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor Global identity: Send the global identity of the new cell of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node. Among them, the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the old cell global identifier is the IAB node access source IAB donor using the cell global identifier.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种切换装置,该装置可应用于IAB节点,装置包括:存储器和处理器,存储器和处理器耦合,存储器存储有程序指令,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:向源IAB donor发送测量结果;接收源IAB donor发送的IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点;向至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a switching device, which can be applied to an IAB node. The device includes: a memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled, the memory stores program instructions, and the program instructions are executed by the processor. , The switching device performs the following steps: sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor; receiving the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the source IAB donor and at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor. Required second configuration information; at least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes; and sends the second configuration information to at least one child node.
在一种可能的实现方式中,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤: 获取IAB node的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识CGI;其中,新小区全球标识为IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;IAB节点接入源IAB donor使用的是旧小区全球标识。In a possible implementation manner, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the handover device executes the following steps: Obtain the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node; where the new cell global identity is the IAB node Switch to the global identity of the cell used by the target IAB donor; the global identity of the old cell used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
在一种可能的实现方式中,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置在获取IAB node的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识之后,执行如下步骤:向目标IAB donor发送指示消息,指示消息包括DU服务的至少一个小区的旧小区全球标识和新小区全球标识。In a possible implementation manner, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps after acquiring the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node: Send an instruction message to the target IAB donor, The indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,指示消息还包括DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。In a possible implementation manner, the indication message also includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若至少一个子节点包括UE,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor,并接收目标IAB donor发送的UE的标识信息;其中,UE的标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的DU服务的小区的旧小区全球标识和UE在DU服务的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI;或者,UE的标识信息包括UE接入IAB节点的DU服务的小区的新小区全球标识和UE在DU服务的小区中的C-RNTI。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node includes a UE, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps: the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the UE identifier sent by the target IAB donor Information; wherein, the UE’s identification information includes the old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the UE’s cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI in the cell served by the DU; or, the UE’s identity information includes the UE The global identity of the new cell of the cell served by the DU accessing the IAB node and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若至少一个子节点包括UE,IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor之前,程序指令被处理器运行时,使得切换装置执行如下步骤:接收源IAB donor发送的目标IAB donor为UE分配的F1接口的标识,F1接口为IAB node和目标IAB donor之间的接口。In a possible implementation, if at least one child node includes a UE, before the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps: Receive the target IAB donor sent by the source IAB donor The identifier of the F1 interface assigned to the UE. The F1 interface is the interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
第五方面,本申请实施例还提供了一种切换系统,系统可以包括源IAB donor、目标IAB donor、IAB节点以及IAB节点的至少一个子节点,其中,IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE和/或其它IAB节点;其中,IAB节点,用于向源IAB donor发送测量结果,测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,源小区属于源IAB donor,目标小区属于目标IAB donor;源IAB donor,用于基于测量结果,确定将IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor,则向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息;目标IAB donor,用于基于IAB节点的上下文信息和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,向源IAB donor发送IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;源IAB donor,还用于向IAB节点发送第一配置信息与第二配置信息;IAB节点,还用于接收第一配置信息与第二配置信息,并向至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application also provides a handover system. The system may include a source IAB donor, a target IAB donor, an IAB node, and at least one child node of the IAB node, where at least one child node of the IAB node includes UE and / Or other IAB nodes; among them, the IAB node is used to send the measurement result to the source IAB donor, the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, where the source cell belongs to the source IAB Donor, the target cell belongs to the target IAB donor; the source IAB donor is used to determine to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result, and then send the context information of the IAB node and the context of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor Information; the target IAB donor is used to send to the source IAB the first configuration information required by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor and at least the IAB node’s first configuration information based on the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node The second configuration information required by a child node to switch to the target IAB donor; the source IAB donor is also used to send the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the IAB node; the IAB node is also used to receive the first configuration information and the first configuration information 2. Configuration information, and sending the second configuration information to at least one child node.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读介质,用于存储计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable medium for storing a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, the computer program including instructions for executing the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序,该计算机程序包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的指令。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program, and the computer program includes instructions for executing the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片包括处理电路、收发管脚。其中,该收发管脚、和该处理电路通过内部连接通路互相通信,该处理电路执行第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法,以控制接收管脚接收信号,以控制发送管脚发送信号。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes a processing circuit and transceiver pins. Wherein, the transceiver pin and the processing circuit communicate with each other through an internal connection path, and the processing circuit executes the method in the first aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the first aspect to control the receiving pin to receive the signal, and Control the sending pin to send signals.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片包括处理电路、收发管脚。其中,该收发管脚、和该处理电路通过内部连接通路互相通信,该处理电路执行第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法,以控制接收管脚接收信号,以控制发送管脚发送信号。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which includes a processing circuit and transceiver pins. Wherein, the transceiver pin and the processing circuit communicate with each other through an internal connection path, and the processing circuit executes the method in the second aspect or any one of the possible implementations of the second aspect to control the receiving pin to receive the signal, and Control the sending pin to send signals.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图之一;FIG. 1 is one of the schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图之一;FIG. 2 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图之一;FIG. 3 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图之一;FIG. 4 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种场景示意图之一;FIG. 5 is one of schematic diagrams of a scenario provided by an embodiment of the application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的切换准备流程示意图之一;FIG. 6 is one of the schematic diagrams of the handover preparation process provided by the embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的切换准备流程示意图之一;FIG. 7 is one of the schematic diagrams of the handover preparation process provided by the embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的切换流程的流程示意图之一;FIG. 8 is one of the schematic flow diagrams of the handover process provided by the embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种协议栈示意图之一;FIG. 9 is one of the schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of this application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种协议栈示意图之一;FIG. 10 is one of the schematic diagrams of a protocol stack provided by an embodiment of this application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的切换方法的流程示意图之一;FIG. 11 is one of the schematic flowcharts of the handover method provided by the embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的切换方法的流程示意图之一;FIG. 12 is one of the schematic flowcharts of the handover method provided by the embodiment of the application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种IAB donor的结构示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB donor provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种IAB node的结构示意图;FIG. 14 is a schematic structural diagram of an IAB node provided by an embodiment of this application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种装置的结构示意图。FIG. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a device provided by an embodiment of this application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述,显然,所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例,而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有作出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and completely in conjunction with the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments are part of the embodiments of the present application, rather than all of them. Based on the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art without creative work shall fall within the protection scope of this application.
本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。The term "and/or" in this article is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, which means that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, exist alone B these three situations.
本申请实施例的说明书和权利要求书中的术语“第一”和“第二”等是用于区别不同的对象,而不是用于描述对象的特定顺序。例如,第一目标对象和第二目标对象等是用于区别不同的目标对象,而不是用于描述目标对象的特定顺序。The terms "first" and "second" in the description and claims of the embodiments of the present application are used to distinguish different objects, rather than to describe a specific order of objects. For example, the first target object and the second target object are used to distinguish different target objects, rather than to describe the specific order of the target objects.
在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。In the embodiments of the present application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used as examples, illustrations, or illustrations. Any embodiment or design solution described as "exemplary" or "for example" in the embodiments of the present application should not be construed as being more preferable or advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions. To be precise, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to present related concepts in a specific manner.
在本申请实施例的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”的含义是指两个或两个以上。例如,多个处理单元是指两个或两个以上的处理单元;多个系统是指两个或两个以上的系统。In the description of the embodiments of the present application, unless otherwise specified, the meaning of "plurality" means two or more. For example, multiple processing units refer to two or more processing units; multiple systems refer to two or more systems.
本申请中,为了进行区分,将触发切换(或者触发群组切换)的IAB node称为切换IAB node,切换IAB node在执行切换之前,包括以下四种场景:In this application, in order to distinguish, the IAB node that triggers the handover (or triggers the group handover) is called the handover IAB node, and the handover IAB node includes the following four scenarios before the handover is performed:
场景1:源IAB donor是切换IAB node的父节点(切换IAB node是源IAB donor的子节点),切换IAB node是UE的父节点(UE是切换IAB node的子节点)。如图1所示。Scenario 1: The source IAB donor is the parent node of the handover IAB node (the handover IAB node is the child node of the source IAB donor), and the handover IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is the child node of the handover IAB node). As shown in Figure 1.
场景2:源IAB donor是切换IAB node的父节点,切换IAB node是其他IAB node的父节点(其他IAB node是切换IAB node的子节点),其他IAB node是UE的父节点(UE是其他IAB node的子节点)。即:切换IAB node和UE之间存在一个或者多个其他IAB node,例如:切换IAB node是IAB node A的父节点,IAB node A是UE的父节点,或者,IAB node A是IAB node B的父节点,IAB node B是UE的父节点。如图2所示。Scenario 2: The source IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node, the switching IAB node is the parent node of the other IAB node (the other IAB node is the child node of the switching IAB node), and the other IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is another IAB child node of node). That is: switching between IAB node and UE has one or more other IAB nodes, for example: switching IAB node is the parent node of IAB node A, IAB node A is the parent node of UE, or IAB node A is IAB node B Parent node, IAB node B is the parent node of the UE. as shown in picture 2.
场景3:源IAB donor是其他IAB node的父节点(其他IAB node是源IAB donor的子节点),其他IAB node是切换IAB node的父节点(切换IAB node是其他IAB node的子节点),切换IAB node是UE的父节点。即:源IAB donor和切换IAB node之间存在一个或者多个其他IAB node,例如:源IAB donor是IAB node C的父节点,IAB node C是切换IAB node的父节点,或者,IAB node C是IAB node D的父节点,IAB node D是切换IAB node的父节点。如图3所示。Scenario 3: The source IAB donor is the parent node of other IAB nodes (other IAB nodes are the child nodes of the source IAB donor), and other IAB nodes are the parent nodes of the switch IAB node (the switch IAB node is the child node of other IAB nodes), switch The IAB node is the parent node of the UE. That is: there are one or more other IAB nodes between the source IAB donor and the switching IAB node, for example: the source IAB donor is the parent node of IAB node C, IAB node C is the parent node of switching IAB node, or IAB node C is The parent node of IAB node D, and IAB node D is the parent node of switching IAB node. As shown in Figure 3.
场景4:源IAB donor是其他IAB node的父节点,其他IAB node是切换IAB node的父节点,切换IAB node是除其他IAB node之外的其他IAB node的父节点,除其他IAB node之外的其他IAB node是UE的父节点。即:源IAB donor和切换IAB node之间存在一个或者多个其他IAB node,而切换IAB node和UE之间也存在一个或者多个其他IAB node。例如:源IAB donor是IAB node C的父节点,IAB node C是切换IAB node的父节点,或者,IAB node C是IAB node D的父节点,IAB node D是切换IAB node的父节点。切换IAB node是IAB node A的父节点,IAB node A是UE的父节点,或者,IAB node A是IAB node B的父节点,IAB node B是UE的父节点。如图4所示。Scenario 4: The source IAB donor is the parent node of another IAB node, the other IAB node is the parent node of the switch IAB node, and the switch IAB node is the parent node of other IAB nodes except other IAB nodes, except for other IAB nodes The other IAB nodes are the parent nodes of the UE. That is, there are one or more other IAB nodes between the source IAB donor and the handover IAB node, and there are one or more other IAB nodes between the handover IAB node and the UE. For example, the source IAB donor is the parent node of IAB node C, IAB node C is the parent node of switching IAB node, or IAB node C is the parent node of IAB node D, and IAB node D is the parent node of switching IAB node. Handover IAB node is the parent node of IAB node A, IAB node A is the parent node of UE, or IAB node A is the parent node of IAB node B, and IAB node B is the parent node of UE. As shown in Figure 4.
切换IAB node在执行切换之后,同样存在以下两种场景,即:目标IAB donor是切换IAB node的父节点(切换IAB node是目标IAB donor的子节点),或者,目标IAB donor和切换IAB node之间存在一个或者多个其他IAB node。After switching the IAB node, the following two scenarios also exist, namely: the target IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node (the switching IAB node is the child node of the target IAB donor), or the target IAB donor and the switching IAB node There are one or more other IAB nodes.
切换IAB node在执行切换过程中,切换IAB node的所有或者部分子节点(例如:UE或者其他IAB node)随着切换IAB node一起切换。Handover IAB node During the handover process, all or part of the sub-nodes of the IAB node (for example: UE or other IAB nodes) are handed over along with the IAB node.
为了描述简单,本专利主要以场景1和2为例进行说明,即:切换IAB node在执行切换之前,源IAB donor是切换IAB node的父节点(切换IAB node是源IAB donor的子节点), 切换IAB node是UE的父节点(UE是切换IAB node的子节点),或者,切换IAB node是其他IAB node的父节点(其他IAB node是切换IAB node的子节点),其他IAB node是UE的父节点(UE是其他IAB node的子节点)。切换IAB node在执行切换之后,目标IAB donor是切换IAB node的父节点。For simplicity of description, this patent mainly uses scenarios 1 and 2 as examples, that is, before switching the IAB node, the source IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node (the switching IAB node is the child node of the source IAB donor). The switching IAB node is the parent node of the UE (the UE is the child node of the switching IAB node), or the switching IAB node is the parent node of other IAB nodes (the other IAB node is the child node of the switching IAB node), and the other IAB nodes are the UE’s Parent node (UE is a child node of other IAB node). After switching the IAB node, the target IAB donor is the parent node of the switching IAB node.
本申请也同样适用于其他场景,就不再赘述。This application is also applicable to other scenarios and will not be repeated here.
上述应用场景或通信系统可以用于支持第四代(fourth generation,4G)接入技术,例如长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)接入技术;或者,该通信系统也可以支持第五代(fifth generation,5G)接入技术,例如新无线(new radio,NR)接入技术。The foregoing application scenarios or communication systems can be used to support fourth-generation (4G) access technologies, such as long-term evolution (LTE) access technologies; or, the communication system can also support fifth-generation (fifth generation) access technologies. generation, 5G) access technology, such as new radio (NR) access technology.
需要说明的是,在第五代移动通信技术(5th-Generation,5G)的CU-DU分离架构下,IAB node由IAB node移动终端(Mobile Termination,MT)和IAB node分布式单元(Distributed Unit,DU)两部分组成,IAB donor由IAB donor集中式单元(Central Unit,CU)和IAB donor DU两部分组成,IAB donor CU和IAB donor DU之间的接口为F1接口,IAB donor CU和IAB node DU之间的接口为F1接口(或者称为F1*接口),本申请不做限定。其中,对于IAB node而言,IAB node DU具有基站的部分功能,例如:基站的物理层(Physical Layer,PHY)、媒体访问控制(Media Access Control,MAC)层、无线链路控制(Radio Link Control,RLC)层的功能,用于为其下附着的子节点提供接入服务。IAB node MT按照类似UE在空中接口的功能,连接到所述IAB node的父节点。对于IAB donor而言,IAB donor DU与IAB node DU的功能类似。IAB donor CU用于控制和管理其下所有IAB node和UE。其中,IAB donor CU又可进一步采用用户面和控制面分离的架构,即:包括IAB donor CU-UP(用户面)实体与IAB donor CU-CP(控制面)实体,IAB donor CU-UP和IAB donor CU-CP之间的接口为E1接口。It should be noted that under the CU-DU separation architecture of the fifth-generation mobile communication technology (5th-Generation, 5G), the IAB node consists of the IAB node mobile terminal (Mobile Termination, MT) and the IAB node distributed unit (Distributed Unit, DU) consists of two parts. IAB donor consists of IAB donor Central Unit (CU) and IAB donor DU. The interface between IAB donor CU and IAB donor DU is the F1 interface, IAB donor CU and IAB node DU The interface between is an F1 interface (or F1* interface), which is not limited in this application. Among them, for IAB node, IAB node DU has some of the functions of the base station, such as the physical layer (PHY) of the base station, the media access control (MAC) layer, and the radio link control (Radio Link Control). , The function of the RLC) layer is used to provide access services to the child nodes attached to it. The IAB node MT is connected to the parent node of the IAB node according to the function similar to the UE in the air interface. For IAB donor, IAB donor DU has similar functions to IAB node DU. The IAB donor CU is used to control and manage all IAB nodes and UEs under it. Among them, IAB donor CU can further adopt the architecture of separating the user plane and the control plane, that is, including the IAB donor CU-UP (user plane) entity and the IAB donor CU-CP (control plane) entity, IAB donor CU-UP and IAB The interface between the donor CU-CP is an E1 interface.
结合图1,如图5所示为示例性的一种应用场景示意图,在图5中,该应用场景包括:接入移动性管理功能(Access and Mobility Management Function,AMF)/用户面功能(User Plane Function,UPF)、源IAB donor、目标IAB donor、切换IAB node以及UE。In conjunction with Figure 1, Figure 5 shows an exemplary application scenario diagram. In Figure 5, the application scenario includes: Access and Mobility Management Function (AMF)/User Plane Function (User Plane Function, UPF), source IAB donor, target IAB donor, handover IAB node and UE.
结合上述如图5所示的应用场景示意图,下面介绍本申请的具体实施方案:In combination with the above-mentioned schematic diagram of the application scenario shown in Figure 5, the following describes the specific implementation scheme of the present application:
方案一Option One
具体的,在本申请中,将IAB node及其子节点切换到目标IAB donor的流程可分为两部分。第一部分为切换准备流程,源IAB donor将IAB node及其子节点的上下文信息迁移到目标IAB donor,并通知目标IAB donor为IAB node及其子节点准备相应的资源。具体步骤可如图6或图7所示。第二部分为切换流程,目标IAB donor准备好后,可执行UE与IAB node的切换流程,具体步骤如图8所示。Specifically, in this application, the process of switching the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor can be divided into two parts. The first part is the handover preparation process. The source IAB donor migrates the context information of the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor, and notifies the target IAB donor to prepare corresponding resources for the IAB node and its child nodes. The specific steps can be shown in Figure 6 or Figure 7. The second part is the handover process. After the target IAB donor is ready, the handover process between the UE and the IAB node can be executed. The specific steps are shown in Figure 8.
结合图5,如图6所示为本申请实施例中提供的切换准备流程示意图,在图6中:In conjunction with FIG. 5, FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a handover preparation process provided in an embodiment of this application. In FIG. 6:
步骤101,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送切换请求消息(Handover Request)。Step 101: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a handover request message (Handover Request) to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
具体的,源IAB donor CU-CP确定需要将切换IAB node及其子节点切换至目标IAB donor,存在以下几种可能:Specifically, the source IAB donor CU-CP determines that it is necessary to switch the IAB node and its child nodes to the target IAB donor. There are several possibilities:
作为一种可能,基于切换IAB node MT上报的测量结果,测量结果中包括切换IAB node  MT对服务小区和邻居小区的信号质量的测量结果,其中,邻居小区包含目标IAB donor的小区。例如:当目标IAB donor的小区的测量结果大于服务小区的测量结果,则源IAB donor CU-CP判决需要将切换IAB node MT切换至目标IAB donor。此外,源IAB donor CU-CP在切换IAB node MT初始接入过程中,可获取用于指示切换IAB节点为移动IAB节点的指示信息,源IAB donor CU-CP可基于该指示信息,判决需要将切换IAB node的子节点和切换IAB node一起切换至目标IAB donor。As a possibility, based on the measurement results reported by the handover IAB node MT, the measurement results include the signal quality measurement results of the handover IAB node MT on the serving cell and the neighbor cell, where the neighbor cell includes the cell of the target IAB donor. For example, when the measurement result of the cell of the target IAB donor is greater than the measurement result of the serving cell, the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that it needs to switch the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor. In addition, the source IAB donor CU-CP can obtain the instruction information for instructing the switch IAB node to be a mobile IAB node during the initial access process of the IAB node MT. The source IAB donor CU-CP can determine the need to change the Switch the child node of the IAB node and switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor together.
具体的,切换IAB node MT初始接入源IAB donor时,会向源IAB donor CU-CP发送一个移动IAB节点指示信息,用于指示当前接入网络的是移动IAB节点。该指示信息可以携带在RRC连接建立请求消息(RRCSetupRequest)中,或者,携带在RRC连接建立完成消息(RRCSetupComplete)中。Specifically, when the IAB node MT initially accesses the source IAB donor, it will send a mobile IAB node indication message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to indicate that the mobile IAB node is currently accessing the network. The indication information may be carried in the RRC connection establishment request message (RRCSetupRequest), or may be carried in the RRC connection establishment complete message (RRCSetupComplete).
作为另一种可能,基于切换IAB node MT上报的测量结果,源IAB donor CU-CP判决需要将切换IAB node MT切换至目标IAB donor。此外,基于切换IAB node MT初始接入过程中或者测量上报过程中携带的一个指示信息,源IAB donor CU-CP判决需要将切换IAB node的子节点和切换IAB node一起切换至目标IAB donor。该指示信息用于指示源IAB donor CU-CP将切换IAB node和切换IAB node的子节点看成一个群组,或者,用于指示将切换IAB node的子节点和切换IAB node一起切换。示例性的,该指示信息可以是群组移动的指示信息,或者群组切换的指示信息,或者群组标识。As another possibility, based on the measurement results reported by the handover IAB node MT, the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that the handover IAB node MT needs to be switched to the target IAB donor. In addition, based on an indication information carried during the initial access process of the handover IAB node MT or the measurement report process, the source IAB donor CU-CP decides that the child node of the handover IAB node and the handover IAB node need to be switched to the target IAB donor together. The indication information is used to instruct the source IAB donor CU-CP to regard the switching IAB node and the child nodes of the IAB node as a group, or to instruct the switching IAB node child nodes and the switching IAB node to switch together. Exemplarily, the indication information may be indication information of group movement, or indication information of group switching, or group identification.
仍参照图6,所述切换请求消息中包括以下至少一种信息:UE的上下文信息、UE的标识信息、切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息、以及切换IAB node DU的上下文信息。Still referring to FIG. 6, the handover request message includes at least one of the following information: UE context information, UE identification information, context information for handover IAB node MT, handover IAB node MT identification information, and handover IAB node DU Contextual information.
其中,UE的上下文信息包括以下至少一种信息:UE业务的QoS信息、UE空口承载的配置信息(例如:PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY层的配置、和/或逻辑信道(Logical Chanel,LCH)的配置等)、UE支持的安全算法等。Wherein, the context information of the UE includes at least one of the following information: QoS information of the UE service, configuration information carried by the UE air interface (for example: PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer configuration, and/or Logical Channel (LCH) Configuration, etc.), the security algorithms supported by the UE, etc.
类似于UE的上下文信息,切换IAB node MT的上下文信息包括以下至少一种信息:切换IAB node MT的QoS信息、切换IAB node MT空口承载的配置信息、切换IAB node MT支持的安全算法等。Similar to the context information of the UE, the context information for switching IAB node MT includes at least one of the following information: switching IAB node MT QoS information, switching IAB node MT air interface bearer configuration information, switching IAB node MT supporting security algorithms, and so on.
切换IAB node DU的上下文信息包括以下至少一种信息:DU的标识、DU服务的至少一个小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本、DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。其中,DU的标识可以是DU ID,或者,也可以是DU的名字(DU name)。DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息可以是显示的指示,也可以是隐式的指示。若为隐式指示,作为另一种示例,则切换IAB node DU的上下文信息包括以下至少一种信息:DU的标识、DU服务的至少一个激活小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个激活小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU服务的至少一个非激活小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个非激活小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本。The context information of the handover IAB node DU includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the DU, the identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU, the physical cell identity PCI of at least one cell served by the DU, the RRC version supported by the DU, and at least the Information indicating whether a cell is activated. Among them, the identifier of the DU may be the DU ID, or may also be the name of the DU (DU name). The indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated may be a displayed indication or an implicit indication. If it is an implicit indication, as another example, the context information of the handover IAB node DU includes at least one of the following information: the identity of the DU, the identity of at least one activated cell served by the DU, the CGI, and the identity of at least one activated cell served by the DU. The physical cell identifier PCI, the identifier CGI of at least one inactive cell served by the DU, the physical cell identifier PCI of at least one inactive cell served by the DU, and the RRC version supported by the DU.
UE的标识信息包括但不限于:小区全球标识(Cell Global Identifier,CGI)和小区无线网络临时标识(Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier,C-RNTI)。其中,CGI为UE附着小区的小区全球标识,C-RNTI是UE附着小区为UE分配的标识。需要说明的是,本申请中,若UE是切换IAB node的子节点时,在切换IAB node切换前后,UE始终附着在切换 IAB node的同一个小区中,只不过由于切换IAB node从源IAB donor切换到目标IAB donor,导致该小区的小区标识CGI发生改变,由旧CGI(old CGI)变为新CGI(new CGI)。旧CGI属于源IAB donor,即:旧CGI包含源IAB donor的基站标识。新CGI属于目标IAB donor,即:新CGI包含目标IAB donor的基站标识。类似的,若UE和切换IAB node之间还存在其他IAB node时(也就是说,其他IAB node是切换IAB node的子节点,UE是其他IAB node的子节点),在切换IAB node切换前后,UE始终附着在其他IAB node的同一个小区中,其他IAB node也始终附着在切换IAB node的同一个小区中,只不过由于宿主节点由源IAB donor变成了目标IAB donor,导致其他IAB node和宿主节点之间的F1接口改变,因此,UE附着在其他IAB node的小区的小区标识CGI发生改变,由旧CGI变为新CGI。The identification information of the UE includes but is not limited to: Cell Global Identifier (CGI) and Cell Radio Network Temporary Identifier (C-RNTI). Among them, CGI is the cell global identity of the cell where the UE is attached, and C-RNTI is the identity allocated to the UE by the cell where the UE is attached. It should be noted that, in this application, if the UE is a child node of the handover IAB node, before and after the handover of the IAB node, the UE is always attached to the same cell where the IAB node is handed over, but because the handover IAB node is from the source IAB donor Switching to the target IAB donor causes the cell identification CGI of the cell to change, from the old CGI (old CGI) to the new CGI (new CGI). The old CGI belongs to the source IAB donor, that is, the old CGI contains the base station identifier of the source IAB donor. The new CGI belongs to the target IAB donor, that is, the new CGI contains the base station identifier of the target IAB donor. Similarly, if there are other IAB nodes between the UE and the handover IAB node (that is, the other IAB node is the child node of the handover IAB node, and the UE is the child node of the other IAB node), before and after the handover IAB node, The UE is always attached to the same cell of other IAB nodes, and other IAB nodes are always attached to the same cell where the IAB node is handed over. However, because the host node changes from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor, other IAB nodes and other IAB nodes are always attached to the same cell. The F1 interface between the host nodes changes. Therefore, the cell identification CGI of the cell where the UE is attached to another IAB node changes, from the old CGI to the new CGI.
为了区分下述实施例中的UE的标识信息,切换IAB node切换之前,UE的标识信息由旧CGI和C-RNTI组成。切换IAB node切换之后,UE的标识信息由新CGI和C-RNTI组成。In order to distinguish the identification information of the UE in the following embodiments, before the handover of the IAB node, the identification information of the UE is composed of the old CGI and C-RNTI. After switching the IAB node, the identification information of the UE is composed of the new CGI and C-RNTI.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-CP接收到UE的上下文信息和UE的标识信息后,可将UE的上下文信息与UE的标识信息进行关联(或匹配),即,目标IAB donor CU-CP可通过UE的标识信息,找到该UE对应的上下文。Optionally, after the target IAB donor CU-CP receives the context information of the UE and the identification information of the UE, it can associate (or match) the context information of the UE with the identification information of the UE. That is, the target IAB donor CU-CP can Through the identification information of the UE, the context corresponding to the UE is found.
可选地,所述切换请求消息可以为Xn接口应用协议(Application Protocol,XnAP)消息。一个示例中,切换请求消息可以为3GPP标准中定义的Handover Request消息。另一个示例中,切换请求消息还可以为新定义的XnAP消息。也就是说,在本申请中,切换IAB node在切换准备时,可采用3GPP标准中定义的Handover Request消息,携带UE的上下文信息和/或UE的标识信息,也可以重新定义一个XnAP消息,该消息的结构可基于其所携带的信息进行设置,以降低信令开销。Optionally, the handover request message may be an Xn interface application protocol (Application Protocol, XnAP) message. In an example, the handover request message may be a Handover Request message defined in the 3GPP standard. In another example, the handover request message may also be a newly defined XnAP message. That is to say, in this application, when the handover IAB node prepares for handover, the Handover Request message defined in the 3GPP standard can be used to carry the context information of the UE and/or the identification information of the UE. An XnAP message can also be redefined. The structure of the message can be set based on the information it carries to reduce signaling overhead.
步骤102,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送承载上下文建立请求(Bearer Context Setup Request)消息。Step 102: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request (Bearer Context Setup Request) message to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
可选地,该消息包括以下至少一种信息:UPF为UE的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息和UPF为切换IAB node MT的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。可选地,UPF为UE分配的NG接口隧道标识信息可以为GPRS隧道协议(GPRS Tunneling Protocol,GTP)隧道端点标识(Tunnel Endpoint Identifier,TEID)和UPF的IP地址。需要说明的是,UPF为UE的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息用于为UE的不同承载建立目标IAB donor CP-UP到UPF的上行GTP隧道。需要说明的是,各网元之间,例如:IAB donor CP-UP与UPF之间,或者,切换IAB node DU与IAB donor CU-UP之间的隧道是双向的,例如:本文所述目标IAB donor CP-UP到UPF的上行GTP隧道是指目标IAB donor CP-UP向UPF发送上行数据(上行数据是指来自UE的数据)所需的隧道。反之,UPF到目标IAB donor CP-UP的下行GTP隧道是指UPF向目标IAB donor CP-UP发送下行数据(下行数据是指发送给UE的数据)所需的隧道。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE and NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT. Optionally, the NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for the UE may be a GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GPRS Tunneling Protocol, GTP) tunnel endpoint identifier (Tunnel Endpoint Identifier, TEID) and an IP address of the UPF. It should be noted that the NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE is used to establish an uplink GTP tunnel from the target IAB donor CP-UP to the UPF for different bearers of the UE. It should be noted that the tunnels between each network element, such as IAB donor CP-UP and UPF, or the tunnel between IAB node DU and IAB donor CU-UP, are bidirectional, for example: the target IAB described in this article The uplink GTP tunnel from the donor CP-UP to the UPF refers to the tunnel required by the target IAB donor CP-UP to send uplink data (uplink data refers to data from the UE) to the UPF. Conversely, the downlink GTP tunnel from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP refers to the tunnel required by the UPF to send downlink data (downlink data refers to data sent to the UE) to the target IAB donor CP-UP.
步骤103,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送承载上下文建立响应(Bearer Context Setup Response)消息。Step 103: The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a bearer context setup response (Bearer Context Setup Response) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信 息,以及,目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE. The tunnel identification information, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息,用于为UE的不同承载建立从UPF到目标IAB donor CP-UP的下行GTP隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish a downlink GTP tunnel from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP for the different bearers of the UE.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息,用于为UE的不同承载建立从切换IAB node DU到目标IAB donor CU-UP的上行GTP隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish an uplink GTP tunnel from the handover IAB node DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于为UE的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP的转发隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish a forwarding tunnel from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE. .
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息,用于为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从UPF到目标IAB donor CP-UP的下行GTP隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for switching the different bearers of the IAB node MT, which is used to establish the downlink GTP from the UPF to the target IAB donor CP-UP for switching the different bearers of the IAB node MT tunnel.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息,用于为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从目标IAB donor DU到目标IAB donor CU-UP的上行GTP隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, and is used to establish the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT from the target IAB donor DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP The uplink GTP tunnel.
可选地,目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP的转发隧道。Optionally, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, and is used to establish the transfer from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor for the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT. CU-UP forwarding tunnel.
步骤104,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor DU发送UE上下文建立请求(UE Context Setup Request)消息。Step 104: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request (UE Context Setup Request) message to the target IAB donor DU.
可选地,该消息可用于指示目标IAB donor DU建立切换IAB node MT的上下文。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息。也就是说,目标IAB donor CU-CP可通过UE Context Setup Request消息,将来自目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息转发给目标IAB donor DU,用于指示目标IAB donor DU为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从目标IAB donor DU到目标IAB donor CU-UP的上行GTP隧道。Optionally, this message can be used to instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish a context for switching the IAB node MT. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT. In other words, the target IAB donor CU-CP can use the UE Context Setup Request message to forward the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface from the target IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor DU for Instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish an uplink GTP tunnel from the target IAB donor DU to the target IAB donor CU-UP to switch different bearers of the IAB node MT.
需要说明的是,该步骤中UE Context Setup Request消息所携带的是与切换IAB node MT相关的信息,对于切换IAB node而言,切换IAB node MT相当于UE,因此,作为另一种可能,UE Context Setup Request消息也可以称为MT Context Setup Request,其结构可参照已有技术中的UE Context Setup Request消息,此处不赘述。It should be noted that in this step, the UE Context Setup Request message carries information related to switching IAB node MT. For switching IAB node, switching IAB node MT is equivalent to UE. Therefore, as another possibility, UE The Context Setup Request message may also be called MT Context Setup Request, and its structure can refer to the UE Context Setup Request message in the prior art, which will not be repeated here.
步骤105,目标IAB donor DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UE上下文建立响应(UE Context Setup Response)消息。Step 105: The target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response (UE Context Setup Response) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息可用于指示目标IAB donor DU已成功建立切换IAB node MT的上下文。Optionally, the message can be used to indicate that the target IAB donor DU has successfully established a context for switching the IAB node MT.
结合图5,如图7所示为本申请实施例中提供的切换准备的流程示意图,在图7中:In conjunction with FIG. 5, FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the flow of handover preparation provided in an embodiment of this application. In FIG. 7:
步骤201,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request消息。Step 201: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息、切换IAB node DU的上下文信息。其中,切换IAB node MT的上下 文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息以及切换IAB node DU的上下文信息可见步骤101中说明,这里不再赘述。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: context information of handover IAB node MT, identification information of handover IAB node MT, and context information of handover IAB node DU. Among them, the context information of switching IAB node MT, the identification information of switching IAB node MT, and the context information of switching IAB node DU can be found in step 101, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,该Handover Request消息可以是现有3GPP标准中定义的Handover Request消息,也可以是新定义的XnAP消息,本申请不做限定。Optionally, the Handover Request message may be a Handover Request message defined in the existing 3GPP standard, or may be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
步骤202,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送XnAP消息。Step 202: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息包括以下至少一种信息:UE的上下文信息和UE的标识信息。其中,UE的上下文信息和UE的标识信息可见步骤101中说明,这里不再赘述。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: context information of the UE and identification information of the UE. Among them, the context information of the UE and the identification information of the UE can be described in step 101, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,该XnAP消息可以是现有3GPP标准中定义的Handover Request消息,也可以是新定义的XnAP消息,本申请不做限定。Optionally, the XnAP message may be a Handover Request message defined in the existing 3GPP standard, or may be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
需要说明的是,步骤201与步骤202的顺序不做限定。It should be noted that the order of step 201 and step 202 is not limited.
步骤203,目标IAB donor CU-CP执行对应于UE的Bearer Context Setup流程。Step 203: The target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Setup process corresponding to the UE.
具体的包括:The specific ones include:
1.目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Setup Request消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于UPF为UE的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。1. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
2.目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Setup Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。2. The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE. The tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
步骤204,目标IAB donor CU-CP执行对应于切换IAB node MT的Bearer Context Setup流程。Step 204: The target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Setup process corresponding to switching the IAB node MT.
具体的包括:The specific ones include:
1.目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Setup Request消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于UPF为切换IAB node MT的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。1. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes, but is not limited to, the NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT.
2.目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Setup Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。2. The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the different bearer of the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the difference between the switch IAB node MT The identification information of the tunnel that bears the allocation on the F1 interface, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for the different bearers of the switch IAB node MT.
需要说明的是,步骤203与步骤204的顺序不做限定。此外,步骤203中的目标IAB donor CU-UP是为UE提供服务的,步骤204中的目标IAB donor CU-UP是为切换IAB node MT提供服务的,步骤203中和步骤204中的目标IAB donor CU-UP可以相同,也可以不同。It should be noted that the order of step 203 and step 204 is not limited. In addition, the target IAB donor CU-UP in step 203 provides services for the UE, the target IAB donor CU-UP in step 204 provides services for handover IAB node MT, and the target IAB donor in step 203 and step 204 CU-UP can be the same or different.
步骤205,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor DU发送UE Context Setup Request消息。Step 205: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor DU.
可选地,该消息可用于指示目标IAB donor DU建立切换IAB node MT的上下文。Optionally, this message can be used to instruct the target IAB donor DU to establish a context for switching the IAB node MT.
步骤206,目标IAB donor DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UE Context Setup Response消息。Step 206: The target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息可用于指示目标IAB donor DU已成功建立切换IAB node MT的上下文。Optionally, the message can be used to indicate that the target IAB donor DU has successfully established a context for switching the IAB node MT.
结合图2和图6(或图7),如图8所示为本申请实施例中提供的切换流程的流程示意图,在图8中:With reference to Fig. 2 and Fig. 6 (or Fig. 7), Fig. 8 is a schematic flow chart of the handover process provided in an embodiment of the application.
步骤301,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送切换请求确认(Handover Request Acknowledge)消息。Step 301: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge (Handover Request Acknowledge) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
结合图6,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、UE的配置信息,以及目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、切换IAB node MT的空口配置信息。With reference to Figure 6, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, the configuration information of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the handover IAB The different bearers of the node MT forward the tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface and switch the air interface configuration information of the IAB node MT.
也就是说,目标IAB donor CU-CP可通过Handover Request Acknowledge消息,将来自目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE和IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息转发给源IAB donor CU-CP。That is to say, the target IAB donor CU-CP can use the Handover Request Acknowledge message to forward the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-UP for the UE and the IAB node MT on the Xn interface to the source IAB donor CU- CP.
结合图7,针对UE和IAB node MT,目标IAB donor CU-CP分别向源IAB donor CU-CP发送不同的切换请求确认消息。其中,针对UE,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送的切换请求确认消息中包含以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、UE的配置信息。针对IAB node MT,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送的切换请求确认消息中包含以下至少一个信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、切换IAB node MT的空口配置信息。With reference to Figure 7, for the UE and the IAB node MT, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends different handover request confirmation messages to the source IAB donor CU-CP respectively. Among them, for the UE, the handover request confirmation message sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP contains at least one of the following information: The target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE Identification information, UE configuration information. For the IAB node MT, the handover request confirmation message sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP contains at least one of the following information: The target IAB donor CU-UP is used to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT allocated on the Xn interface Forward the tunnel identification information and switch the air interface configuration information of the IAB node MT.
可选地,UE的配置信息包括以下至少一种信息:新安全算法、空口密钥对应的下一跳链接计数(Next hop Chaining Count,NCC)值、UE不同承载对应的分组数据汇聚协议(Packet Data Convergence Protocol,PDCP)层配置等。其中,UE的配置信息可以携带在无线资源控制重配置(Radio Resource Control Reconfiguration,RRCReconfiguration)消息中,或者其他RRC消息中。即:携带UE配置信息的RRCReconfiguration消息或者其他RRC消息作为一个RRC container,携带在切换请求确认消息中。Optionally, the configuration information of the UE includes at least one of the following information: the new security algorithm, the Next Hop Chaining Count (NCC) value corresponding to the air interface key, and the packet data convergence protocol (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) corresponding to different bearers of the UE. Data Convergence Protocol, PDCP) layer configuration, etc. Among them, the configuration information of the UE may be carried in a radio resource control reconfiguration (Radio Resource Control Reconfiguration, RRC Reconfiguration) message, or other RRC messages. That is, the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages that carry UE configuration information are used as an RRC container and are carried in the handover request confirmation message.
可选地,切换IAB node MT的空口配置信息包括以下至少一种信息:切换IAB node MT不同承载对应的PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY层的配置、逻辑信道LCH的配置、新空口密钥对应的NCC值、新安全算法等。其中,切换IAB node MT的空口配置可以携带在RRCReconfiguration消息中,或者其他RRC消息中。即:携带切换IAB node MT的空口配置信息的RRCReconfiguration消息或者其他RRC消息作为一个RRC container,携带在切换请求确认消息中。Optionally, the air interface configuration information of the switching IAB node MT includes at least one of the following information: the configuration of the PDCP/RLC/MAC/PHY layer corresponding to different bearers of the switching IAB node MT, the configuration of the logical channel LCH, and the corresponding information of the new air interface key. NCC value, new security algorithm, etc. Among them, the air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT can be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages. That is, the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages that carry the air interface configuration information of the handover IAB node MT are used as an RRC container and carried in the handover request confirmation message.
一个示例中,Handover Request Acknowledge消息可以为现有3GPP标准中定义的Handover Request Acknowledge消息。另一个示例中,Handover Request Acknowledge消息还可以是新定义的XnAP消息,本申请不做限定。In an example, the Handover Request Acknowledge message may be the Handover Request Acknowledge message defined in the existing 3GPP standard. In another example, the Handover Request Acknowledge message may also be a newly defined XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
步骤302,源IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送UE上下文修改请求(UE Context Modification Request)消息。Step 302: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request (UE Context Modification Request) message to the handover IAB node DU.
可选地,UE Context Modification Request消息包括以下至少一种信息:UE的配置信息以及传输动作指示信息(Transmission Action Indicator IE),该指示信息用于指示切换IAB node DU停止与UE之间的数据传输,并停止向源IAB donor CU-UP发送数据。Optionally, the UE Context Modification Request message includes at least one of the following information: UE configuration information and Transmission Action Indicator IE, which is used to instruct the IAB node DU to stop data transmission with the UE. , And stop sending data to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
步骤303,切换IAB node DU向UE发送RRCReconfiguration消息,该消息中携带UE的配置信息,以便UE根据目标IAB donor CU-CP的配置进行更新。即,UE接收到RRCReconfiguration消息后,可基于其所包括的新配置更新本地配置。Step 303: The handover IAB node DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE, which carries the configuration information of the UE so that the UE can update according to the configuration of the target IAB donor CU-CP. That is, after receiving the RRCReconfiguration message, the UE can update the local configuration based on the new configuration included in it.
需要说明的是,由于切换IAB node从源IAB donor切换到目标IAB donor,导致为UE提供服务的宿主节点也从源IAB donor变成目标IAB donor。虽然切换IAB node切换前后,UE始终附着在切换IAB node DU的同一个小区中,但由于宿主节点的改变,使得UE的PDCP层配置或者安全算法或者安全密钥都需要更新,该过程可称为UE配置更新或者UE切换,本申请不做限定。It should be noted that because the handover IAB node switches from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor, the host node that provides services for the UE also changes from the source IAB donor to the target IAB donor. Although the UE is always attached to the same cell where the IAB node DU is handed over before and after the handover of the IAB node, due to the change of the host node, the PDCP layer configuration or security algorithm or security key of the UE needs to be updated. This process can be called The UE configuration update or UE handover is not limited in this application.
步骤304,切换IAB node DU向源IAB donor CU-CP发送UE上下文修改响应(UE Context Modification Response)消息。Step 304: The handover IAB node DU sends a UE Context Modification Response (UE Context Modification Response) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
步骤305,源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送承载上下文修改请求(Bearer Context Modification Request)消息。Step 305: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request (Bearer Context Modification Request) message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于源IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP转发隧道。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
步骤306,源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送承载上下文修改响应(Bearer Context Modification Response)消息。Step 306: The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response (Bearer Context Modification Response) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息,例如:下行方向上,分配给下一个PDCP服务数据单元(Service Data Unit,SDU)的计数(COUNT)值(COUNT值由PDCP SN(Sequence Number,序列号)和HFN(Hyper Frame Number,超帧号)组成),或者,分配给下一个PDCP SDU的PDCP SN值,和上行方向上,第一个丢失的PDCP SDU对应的COUNT值或者PDCP SN值,以及从第一个丢失PDCP SDU开始各个PDCP SDU的接收情况。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE, for example: in the downlink direction, the count (COUNT) value allocated to the next PDCP service data unit (Service Data Unit, SDU) ( The COUNT value is composed of PDCP SN (Sequence Number) and HFN (Hyper Frame Number)), or the PDCP SN value assigned to the next PDCP SDU, and the first PDCP missing in the upstream direction The COUNT value or PDCP SN value corresponding to the SDU, and the reception status of each PDCP SDU starting from the first missing PDCP SDU.
步骤307,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送序列号状态传输(SN Status Transfer)消息。Step 307: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a sequence number status transfer (SN Status Transfer) message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息包括但不限于:源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。也就是说,源IAB donor CU-CP通过SN Status Transfer消息,将从源IAB donor CU-UP接收到的UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息发送给目标IAB donor CU-CP。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP. That is to say, the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the status information of the PDCP corresponding to the different bearers of the UE received from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the SN Status Transfer message.
步骤308,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息,该消息中包括所述源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Step 308: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP, and the message includes the PDCP status information corresponding to different UEs on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
步骤309,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。Step 309: The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
需要说明的是,步骤305至步骤309可以理解为当UE切换至目标IAB donor后,但源IAB donor CU-UP上可能仍存在UE的数据,例如:已经发送给UE但未收到UE正确接收反馈的数据,或者还尚未发送给UE的数据,因此,为了保证UE无损的数据接收,源IAB donor CU-UP需要通过转发隧道将这些UE的数据转发到目标IAB donor CU-UP,由目标IAB donor CU-UP进一步发送给UE。具体的,步骤309之后,源IAB donor CU-UP可基于步骤305中为UE的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP 转发隧道,向目标IAB donor CU-UP转发UE数据。It should be noted that steps 305 to 309 can be understood as when the UE switches to the target IAB donor, but the source IAB donor CU-UP may still have the UE data, for example: it has been sent to the UE but the UE has not received it correctly. Feedback data, or data that has not yet been sent to the UE. Therefore, in order to ensure the lossless data reception of the UE, the source IAB donor CU-UP needs to forward these UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel, and the target IAB The donor CU-UP is further sent to the UE. Specifically, after step 309, the source IAB donor CU-UP can establish a GTP forwarding tunnel from the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE in step 305, and then to the target IAB donor CU-UP. UP forwards UE data.
步骤310,UE向切换IAB node DU发送RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。Step 310: The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
一个示例中,UE可以在发送RRCReconfigurationComplete消息之后,再生效步骤303中收到的新配置。即:UE基于步骤303之前使用的配置,对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息进行安全处理后发送。也就是说,UE使用与源IAB donor CU-CP对等的安全算法和密钥对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息进行安全处理后发送到切换IAB node DU,切换IAB node DU将收到的RRCReconfigurationComplete消息作为一个container携带在F1AP消息中发送到源IAB donor CU-CP。源IAB donor CU-CP从F1AP消息中提取出该container,并将该container携带在XnAP消息中发送到目标IAB donor CU-CP。In an example, the UE may validate the new configuration received in step 303 after sending the RRCReconfigurationComplete message. That is, based on the configuration used before step 303, the UE performs security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and sends it. In other words, the UE uses the security algorithm and key equivalent to the source IAB donor CU-CP to perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message and then sends it to the handover IAB node DU, and the handover IAB node DU carries the received RRCReconfigurationComplete message as a container. The F1AP message is sent to the source IAB donor CU-CP. The source IAB donor CU-CP extracts the container from the F1AP message, and the container is carried in the XnAP message and sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
另一个示例中,UE可基于步骤303中接收到的新配置,对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息进行安全处理后发送,例如,使用新的安全算法和密钥对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息加密,具体存在两种方式。In another example, the UE may perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message based on the new configuration received in step 303 and then send it, for example, using a new security algorithm and key to encrypt the RRCReconfigurationComplete message. There are two specific methods.
方式一中,切换IAB node DU接收到RRCReconfigurationComplete消息后,可通过源IAB donor CU-CP,将RRCReconfigurationComplete消息发送给目标IAB donor CU-CP,如图中的步骤311~步骤312所示,该种传输方式对应的协议栈如图9所示。In method 1, after the handover IAB node DU receives the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, it can send the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP, as shown in steps 311 to 312 in the figure. The protocol stack corresponding to the method is shown in Figure 9.
方式二中,切换IAB node DU接收到RRCReconfigurationComplete消息后,可先将该消息缓存于本地。切换IAB node DU可在对应的切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor,并且切换IAB node DU与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间建立F1接口后,再向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。如图中的步骤311’~步骤312’所示,该种传输方式对应的协议栈如图10所示。In the second method, after the handover IAB node DU receives the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, the message can be cached locally. The switch IAB node DU can switch to the target IAB donor in the corresponding switch IAB node MT, and after the F1 interface is established between the switch IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP . As shown in step 311' to step 312' in the figure, the protocol stack corresponding to this transmission mode is shown in figure 10.
可选地,步骤310可直接在步骤303之后执行。步骤302和步骤305的顺序不限定,本申请不做限定。Optionally, step 310 may be performed directly after step 303. The order of step 302 and step 305 is not limited, and is not limited in this application.
步骤311,切换IAB node DU向源IAB donor CU-CP发送上行RRC消息传输(UL RRC Message Transfer)消息。Step 311: Switch the IAB node DU to send an uplink RRC message transfer (UL RRC Message Transfer) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在UL RRC Message Transfer消息中。Optionally, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
步骤312,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送XnAP消息。Step 312: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在XnAP消息中。其中,该XnAP消息可以为新定义的XnAP消息,或者,该XnAP消息可以为现有XnAP消息,本申请不做限定。Optionally, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in an XnAP message. The XnAP message may be a newly defined XnAP message, or the XnAP message may be an existing XnAP message, which is not limited in this application.
步骤313,目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发UE的path switch流程,以及向源IAB donor CU-CP触发UE的上下文释放流程。Step 313: The target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
其中,path switch流程和UE上下文释放流程的具体步骤在图中未示出,path switch流程可以包括:The specific steps of the path switch process and the UE context release process are not shown in the figure, and the path switch process may include:
1.目标IAB donor CU-CP将目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息发送给UPF,用于UPF为UE的不同承载建立从UPF到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的下行GTP隧道。1. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends the tunnel identification information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-UP on the NG interface to the UPF for different bearers of the UE, which is used to establish the UPF to the target IAB donor CU-UP for the different bearers of the UE. Corresponding downlink GTP tunnel.
2.UPF向源IAB donor CU-UP发送End Marker数据包,以通知源IAB donor CU-UP当前是从UPF收到的最后一个数据包。2. The UPF sends an End Marker packet to the source IAB donor CU-UP to notify the source IAB donor that the CU-UP is currently the last packet received from the UPF.
3.UPF向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送新数据。具体的,UPF可基于已为UE的不同承载建立从UPF到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的下行GTP隧道,向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送UE的新数据。3. UPF sends new data to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Specifically, the UPF may establish a downlink GTP tunnel corresponding to the target IAB donor CU-UP from the UPF to the target IAB donor CU-UP based on the different bearers of the UE, and send the new data of the UE to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
UE上下文释放流程可以包括:The UE context release procedure may include:
1.目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送UE上下文释放(UE Context Release)消息,用于指示源IAB donor CU-CP触发删除UE上下文流程。1. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Release (UE Context Release) message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to instruct the source IAB donor CU-CP to trigger the UE context deletion process.
2.源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送承载上下文释放命令(Bearer Context Release Command)消息,用于指示源IAB donor CU-UP删除UE的上下文。2. The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Release Command message to the source IAB donor CU-UP to instruct the source IAB donor CU-UP to delete the context of the UE.
3.源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送承载上下文释放完成(Bearer Context Release Complete)消息,用于指示源IAB donor CU-UP已成功删除UE的上下文。3. The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Release Complete message to the source IAB donor CU-CP to indicate that the source IAB donor CU-UP has successfully deleted the context of the UE.
步骤311’,切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息。Step 311', switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在UL RRC Message Transfer消息中。Optionally, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
步骤312’与步骤313相同,此处不赘述。Step 312' is the same as step 313, and will not be repeated here.
源IAB donor CU-CP将UE的配置信息发送给UE之后,就可以触发切换IAB node MT的切换流程。具体的:After the source IAB donor CU-CP sends the configuration information of the UE to the UE, it can trigger the handover process of the IAB node MT. specific:
步骤314,源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor DU发送UE Context Modification Request消息。Step 314: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor DU.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:切换IAB node MT的RRCReconfiguration消息。其中,该RRCReconfiguration消息中包括切换IAB node MT的新空口配置,用于指示切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor,并根据该新空口配置更新本地配置。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: RRCReconfiguration message for handover IAB node MT. Among them, the RRCReconfiguration message includes the new air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT, which is used to instruct the IAB node MT to switch to the target IAB donor, and to update the local configuration according to the new air interface configuration.
可选地,步骤314可在302之后执行,也就是说,源IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送UE Context Modification Request消息之后,则可执行步骤314。或者,步骤314可以在304之后执行,也就是说,源IAB donor CU-CP收到切换IAB node DU发送的UE Context Modification Response消息之后,则可执行步骤314。本申请不做限定。Optionally, step 314 may be performed after 302, that is, after the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU, step 314 may be performed. Alternatively, step 314 may be performed after 304, that is, after the source IAB donor CU-CP receives the UE Context Modification Response message sent by the handover IAB node DU, step 314 may be performed. This application is not limited.
步骤315,源IAB donor DU向切换IAB node MT发送RRCReconfiguration消息。切换IAB node MT接收到RRCReconfiguration消息后,执行切换流程。即:根据收到的新空口配置更新本地配置,并向目标IAB donor发起随机接入。Step 315: The source IAB donor DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the handover IAB node MT. After the handover IAB node MT receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it executes the handover process. That is: update the local configuration according to the received new air interface configuration, and initiate random access to the target IAB donor.
可选地,源IAB donor CU-UP还可以将切换IAB node MT的PDCP状态信息发送到目标IAB donor CU-UP,具体包括步骤316至步骤321:Optionally, the source IAB donor CU-UP may also send the PDCP status information of the switching IAB node MT to the target IAB donor CU-UP, which specifically includes steps 316 to 321:
步骤316,源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。Step 316: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于源IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP转发隧道。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT Different bearers establish GTP forwarding tunnels corresponding to the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
步骤317,源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。Step 317: The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态 信息。具体的,PDCP的状态信息与步骤306中的描述一致,这里不再赘述。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: switch the status information of PDCP corresponding to different bearers of IAB node MT. Specifically, the PDCP status information is consistent with the description in step 306, and will not be repeated here.
步骤318,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送SN Status Transfer消息。Step 318: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息包括但不限于:源IAB donor CU-UP上切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
步骤319,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息,该消息中包括所述源IAB donor CU-UP上切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Step 319: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor UP, and the message includes the status information of the PDCP corresponding to the different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
步骤320,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。Step 320: The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
步骤321,源IAB donor CU-UP通过转发隧道向目标IAB donor CU-UP进行切换IAB node MT数据的转发。Step 321: The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the IAB node MT data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
步骤322,切换IAB node MT向目标IAB donor DU发送RRC Reconfiguration Complete消息。Step 322: Switch the IAB node MT and send an RRC Reconfiguration Complete message to the target IAB donor DU.
步骤323,目标IAB donor DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息,该消息中携带从切换IAB node MT收到的RRC Reconfiguration Complete消息。Step 323: The target IAB donor DU sends a UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the message carries the RRC Reconfiguration Complete message received from the handover IAB node MT.
步骤324,目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发切换IAB node MT的path switch流程,以及向源IAB donor CU-CP触发切换IAB node的上下文释放流程。In step 324, the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of switching the IAB node MT to the AMF, and triggers the context release process of switching the IAB node to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
需要说明的是,切换IAB node MT切换的步骤与UE切换时类似,具体细节可参照步骤302~步骤314。It should be noted that the steps for handover of IAB node MT handover are similar to those during UE handover. For details, please refer to step 302 to step 314.
步骤325,切换IAB node DU触发向目标IAB donor CU-CP之间的F1接口建立流程。Step 325: Switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
具体的,切换IAB node MT通过内部接口通知切换IAB node DU,其已成功切换到目标IAB donor CU-CP,以便触发切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP请求F1接口的建立流程。Specifically, the switching IAB node MT notifies the switching IAB node DU through the internal interface, and it has successfully switched to the target IAB donor CU-CP, so as to trigger the switching IAB node DU to request the establishment process of the F1 interface from the target IAB donor CU-CP.
需要说明的是,切换IAB node DU触发向目标IAB donor CU-CP请求F1接口建立流程之前,还需要额外的执行以下操作:It should be noted that before switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process to the target IAB donor CU-CP, the following additional operations are required:
操作1:切换IAB node DU需要获取目标IAB donor CU-CP的IP地址信息。Operation 1: Switching the IAB node DU needs to obtain the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP.
一个示例中,在切换准备过程中,目标IAB donor CU-CP的IP地址信息可以通过源IAB donor CU-CP发送给切换IAB node DU。例如:携带在步骤301中的Handover Request Acknowledge消息与步骤302中的UE Context Modification Request消息中。或者,携带在切换准备过程中的其他消息中,本申请不做限定。In an example, during the handover preparation process, the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP can be sent to the handover IAB node DU through the source IAB donor CU-CP. For example, it is carried in the Handover Request Acknowledge message in step 301 and the UE Context Modification Request message in step 302. Or, it is carried in other messages in the handover preparation process, which is not limited in this application.
另一个示例中,在切换准备过程中,目标IAB donor CU-CP的IP地址信息可以通过源IAB donor CU-CP发送给切换IAB node MT,再由切换IAB node MT通过内部接口发送给切换IAB node DU。例如:携带在步骤301中的Handover Request Acknowledge消息、步骤314中的UE Context Modification Request消息与步骤315中的RRCReconfiguration消息中。或者,携带在切换准备过程中的其他消息中,本申请不做限定。In another example, during the handover preparation process, the IP address information of the target IAB donor CU-CP can be sent to the switching IAB node MT through the source IAB donor CU-CP, and then the switching IAB node MT is sent to the switching IAB node through the internal interface DU. For example, it is carried in the Handover Request Acknowledge message in step 301, the UE Context Modification Request message in step 314, and the RRCReconfiguration message in step 315. Or, it is carried in other messages in the handover preparation process, which is not limited in this application.
又一个示例中,切换IAB node DU接入目标IAB donor后,目标IAB donor CU-CP将其IP地址信息携带在RRC消息中发送到切换IAB node MT,再由切换IAB node MT通过内部接口发送给切换IAB node DU。In another example, after the switch IAB node DU accesses the target IAB donor, the target IAB donor CU-CP carries its IP address information in the RRC message and sends it to the switch IAB node MT, which is then sent to the switch IAB node MT through the internal interface Switch IAB node DU.
操作2:切换IAB node DU与目标IAB donor CU-CP建立流控制传输协议(Stream Control  Transmission Protocol,SCTP)关联(association)。Operation 2: Switch the IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP to establish a Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) association.
切换IAB node DU和目标IAB donor CU-CP建立F1接口之前,需要先建立SCTP关联。因为F1接口上传递的F1AP消息是通过SCTP关联进行传输的。Before switching the IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP to establish an F1 interface, it is necessary to establish an SCTP association. Because the F1AP message transmitted on the F1 interface is transmitted through the SCTP association.
操作3:切换IAB node DU获取新的配置信息。Operation 3: Switch IAB node DU to obtain new configuration information.
切换IAB node DU新的配置信息中包括但不限于:切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新的小区全球标识CGI。其中,切换IAB node DU的服务小区可能存在多个,则新的配置信息中就包含多个CGI,不同小区对应不同CGI。The new configuration information of the handover IAB node DU includes but is not limited to: the new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU. Among them, there may be multiple serving cells for switching the IAB node DU, and the new configuration information contains multiple CGIs, and different cells correspond to different CGIs.
具体的,切换IAB node DU获取新的配置信息,存在两种方案:Specifically, there are two solutions for switching IAB node DU to obtain new configuration information:
1.切换IAB node DU切换到目标IAB donor后,通过目标IAB donor从OAM服务器获取新的配置信息,或者,切换IAB node DU还可以通过其他方式获取到新的配置信息,本申请不做限制。1. After switching the IAB node DU to the target IAB donor, the target IAB donor obtains the new configuration information from the OAM server, or the switching IAB node DU can also obtain the new configuration information in other ways, and this application does not restrict it.
获取到新的配置信息后,切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新CGI和对应的旧CGI。可选地,该第一指示信息还可以包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息,以便目标IAB donor CU-CP获知切换IAB node DU服务的小区哪些是已经被激活的。示例性的,该第一指示信息可以携带在F1接口建立请求消息(F1Setup Request)中,或者其他F1AP消息中,本申请中不做限定。可选地,切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息可以是显示的指示,也可以是隐式的指示。若为隐式指示,作为另一种示例,则获取到新的配置信息后,切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个激活小区的新CGI和对应的旧CGI,和/或,切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个非激活小区的新CGI和对应的旧CGI。After obtaining the new configuration information, the handover IAB node DU sends the first indication information to the target IAB donor CU-CP. The first indication information includes the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of the at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU. Optionally, the first indication information may also include information indicating whether at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU is activated, so that the target IAB donor CU-CP learns which of the cells served by the handover IAB node DU have been activated. Exemplarily, the first indication information may be carried in an F1 interface setup request message (F1Setup Request) or other F1AP messages, which is not limited in this application. Optionally, the indication information indicating whether at least one cell served by the IAB node DU is activated may be a displayed indication or an implicit indication. If it is an implicit instruction, as another example, after acquiring the new configuration information, switch the IAB node DU to send the first instruction information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the first instruction information includes the switch IAB node DU service The new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one activated cell, and/or the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one inactive cell served by the IAB node DU.
2.切换准备过程中,切换IAB node DU通过源IAB donor CU-CP从目标IAB donor CU-CP获取新的配置信息。2. During the handover preparation process, the handover IAB node DU obtains the new configuration information from the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP.
为了帮助目标IAB donor CU-CP为切换IAB node DU分配新的配置信息,则在切换准备过程中,源IAB donor CU-CP需要将切换IAB node DU的上下文信息发送给目标IAB donor CU-CP。其中,切换IAB node DU的上下文信息在步骤101中已有描述,这里不再赘述。In order to help the target IAB donor CU-CP allocate new configuration information for the handover IAB node DU, the source IAB donor CU-CP needs to send the context information of the handover IAB node DU to the target IAB donor CU-CP during the handover preparation process. Among them, the context information of switching the IAB node DU has been described in step 101, and will not be repeated here.
可选地,获取到新的配置信息后,其中,新的配置信息包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新的小区全球标识CGI。切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新CGI和对应的旧CGI。Optionally, after obtaining the new configuration information, the new configuration information includes a new cell global identity CGI for switching at least one cell served by the IAB node DU. The handover IAB node DU sends first indication information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, where the first indication information includes the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of the at least one cell served by the handover IAB node DU.
可选地,切换IAB node DU通过源IAB donor CU-CP从目标IAB donor CU-CP获取新的配置信息还可以包括切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新CGI和对应的旧CGI。Optionally, switching the IAB node DU to obtain new configuration information from the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP may also include switching the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI of at least one cell served by the IAB node DU.
步骤326,UE的上下文建立流程。Step 326: UE's context establishment process.
值得说明的是,切换IAB node DU触发与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间的F1接口建立过程,则将导致切换IAB node DU删除UE在F1接口的应用层上下文。例如:切换IAB node DU删除UE在F1接口上的标识F1AP ID,和/或切换IAB node DU删除F1接口上分配的per UE bearer的GTP隧道等。因此,一旦切换IAB node DU和目标IAB donor CU-CP之间 建立F1接口,则目标IAB donor CU-CP需要向切换IAB node DU触发UE的上下文建立流程。It is worth noting that switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP, which will cause the switching IAB node DU to delete the UE's application layer context on the F1 interface. For example: switching IAB node DU to delete the F1AP ID of the UE on the F1 interface, and/or switching IAB node DU to delete the GTP tunnel of the per UE bearer allocated on the F1 interface, etc. Therefore, once the F1 interface is established between the handover IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the target IAB donor CU-CP needs to switch to the IAB node DU to trigger the context establishment process of the UE.
切换IAB node DU的子节点UE可能存在多个,为了让切换IAB node DU识别为哪个UE建立上下文,存在两种可能方案。There may be multiple child node UEs for switching the IAB node DU. In order for the switching IAB node DU to recognize which UE establishes the context, there are two possible solutions.
1.在切换准备过程中,目标IAB donor CU-CP从源IAB donor CU-CP获取UE的标识,即:旧CGI和C-RNTI。其中,旧CGI是UE附着的切换IAB node DU服务的小区的标识,此时,该切换IAB node DU服务的小区属于源IAB donor。C-RNTI是UE附着的切换IAB node DU服务的小区为UE分配的标识。1. During the handover preparation process, the target IAB donor CU-CP obtains the identity of the UE from the source IAB donor CU-CP, that is, the old CGI and C-RNTI. Among them, the old CGI is the identifier of the cell served by the handover IAB node DU to which the UE is attached. At this time, the cell served by the handover IAB node DU belongs to the source IAB donor. C-RNTI is the identifier assigned to the UE by the cell served by the IAB node DU to which the UE is attached.
切换完成后,切换IAB node DU获取新的配置信息,并将UE附着的切换IAB node DU服务的小区的标识由旧CGI更新为新CGI,同时,将UE的标识更新由旧CGI和C-RNTI更新为新CGI和C-RNTI。然后,切换IAB node DU触发与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间的F1接口建立过程中(即步骤325),切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送小区标识的变更信息,变更信息包括切换IAB node DU所有小区的旧CGI和对应的新CGI。目标IAB donor CU-CP根据收到的该信息,将缓存的UE的标识信息更新,即:将旧CGI和C-RNTI更新为新CGI和C-RNTI。After the handover is completed, the handover IAB node DU obtains the new configuration information, and the identity of the cell served by the handover IAB node DU to which the UE is attached is updated from the old CGI to the new CGI. At the same time, the UE’s identity is updated from the old CGI and C-RNTI Update to new CGI and C-RNTI. Then, the handover IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP (that is, step 325), the handover IAB node DU sends the cell identification change information to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the change information includes the handover IAB node DU Old CGI and corresponding new CGI of all cells. The target IAB donor CU-CP updates the cached UE identification information according to the received information, that is, updates the old CGI and C-RNTI to the new CGI and C-RNTI.
目标IAB donor CU-CP将更新后的UE的标识信息(新CGI+C-RNTI)携带于UE Context Setup Request消息中发送给切换IAB node DU。切换IAB node DU根据收到的新CGI和C-RNTI信息就能识别其下附着的UE。The target IAB donor CU-CP carries the updated UE identification information (new CGI+C-RNTI) in the UE Context Setup Request message and sends it to the handover IAB node DU. The handover IAB node DU can identify the UE attached to it according to the received new CGI and C-RNTI information.
2.目标IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送UE Context Setup Request消息,并且UE Context Setup Request消息中携带UE的标识信息(旧CGI和C-RNTI)。切换IAB node DU根据UE的标识信息识别UE,并根据获取的新的配置信息更新UE的标识,例如:将旧CGI和C-RNTI更新为新CGI和C-RNTI,并将更新后的UE标识(新CGI和C-RNTI)携带在UE Context Setup Response消息中发送给目标IAB donor CU-CP,目标IAB donor CU-CP根据接收到的消息,更新UE的标识信息。2. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the handover IAB node DU, and the UE Context Setup Request message carries the identification information of the UE (old CGI and C-RNTI). Switch IAB node DU to identify the UE according to the UE's identification information, and update the UE's identification according to the new configuration information obtained, for example: update the old CGI and C-RNTI to the new CGI and C-RNTI, and update the UE identification (New CGI and C-RNTI) are carried in the UE Context Setup Response message and sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP, and the target IAB donor CU-CP updates the identification information of the UE according to the received message.
本申请中,切换之前,为UE提供服务的源IAB donor CU-UP和为切换IAB node MT提供服务的源IAB donor CU-UP可以相同,也可以不同。切换之后,为UE提供服务的目标IAB donor CU-UP和为切换IAB node MT提供服务的目标IAB donor CU-UP也可以相同或者不同,本申请不做限定。In this application, before the handover, the source IAB donor CU-UP serving the UE and the source IAB donor CU-UP serving the handover IAB node MT may be the same or different. After the handover, the target IAB donor CU-UP serving the UE and the target IAB donor CU-UP serving the handover IAB node MT may also be the same or different, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,在本申请中,UE的标识信息除可使用CGI和C-RNTI的形式外,还可以通过IAB donor CU-CP为UE分配F1接口的标识信息(可简称为UE F1AP ID)以标识UE。也就是说,IAB donor CU-CP为UE所分配的F1接口的标识在该IAB donor CU-CP上是唯一的,IAB donor CU-CP可基于UE F1AP ID,识别对应的UE。Optionally, in this application, the identification information of the UE can be in the form of CGI and C-RNTI, and the identification information of the F1 interface (which can be referred to as UE F1AP ID) can also be allocated to the UE through the IAB donor CU-CP. Identify the UE. In other words, the identifier of the F1 interface assigned by the IAB donor CU-CP to the UE is unique on the IAB donor CU-CP, and the IAB donor CU-CP can identify the corresponding UE based on the UE F1AP ID.
具体的,采用UE F1AP ID标识UE的方式的实施例中,其切换前准备的流程与图6或图7中类似,不同的是,源IAB donor CU-CP无需向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UE的标识信息(CGI和C-RNTI)。并且,在切换准备的过程中,目标IAB donor CU-CP通过源IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送为UE分配的UE F1AP ID。可选地,UE F1AP ID可携带在切换准备过程中的任一消息中,本申请不做限定。Specifically, in the embodiment that uses the UE F1AP ID to identify the UE, the pre-handover preparation process is similar to that in Figure 6 or Figure 7, except that the source IAB donor CU-CP does not need to send to the target IAB donor CU-CP UE's identification information (CGI and C-RNTI). In addition, in the process of handover preparation, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends the UE F1AP ID allocated to the UE to the handover IAB node DU through the source IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the UE F1AP ID can be carried in any message in the handover preparation process, which is not limited in this application.
在切换IAB node MT切换完成后,切换IAB node MT向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送 F1AP消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:UE的RRCReconfigurationComplete消息和目标IAB donor CU-CP为UE分配的F1隧道标识信息(UE F1AP ID)。即,切换IAB node MT通过F1AP消息向目标IAB donor CU-CP转发UE的RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。目标IAB donor CU-CP可基于接收的UE F1AP ID,识别是哪个UE,并与切换准备过程中从源IAB donor CU-CP获取的UE的上下文进行匹配。After the handover of the IAB node MT is completed, the handover IAB node MT sends the F1AP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the RRCReconfigurationComplete message of the UE and the F1 tunnel identification information (UE F1AP ID) allocated by the target IAB donor CU-CP for the UE. That is, the handover IAB node MT forwards the UE's RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the F1AP message. The target IAB donor CU-CP can identify which UE it is based on the received UE F1AP ID, and match it with the UE context obtained from the source IAB donor CU-CP during the handover preparation process.
需要说明的是,该标识方式(即用F1接口的标识信息标识UE)同样可应用于方案二和方案三的实施例中,为避免重复说明,下文中不再赘述。It should be noted that this identification method (that is, the identification information of the F1 interface is used to identify the UE) can also be applied to the embodiments of Scheme 2 and Scheme 3. In order to avoid repetitive description, it will not be described in detail below.
方案二Option II
结合图5,如图11所示为本申请实施例中提供的切换方法的流程示意图,在图11中:With reference to FIG. 5, FIG. 11 is a schematic flowchart of a handover method provided in an embodiment of the application. In FIG. 11:
步骤401,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request。Step 401: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:UE的上下文和UE的标识信息。该消息可用于告知目标IAB donor CU-CP准备将附着在切换IAB node DU小区的UE切换至目标IAB donor。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: UE context and UE identification information. This message can be used to inform the target IAB donor CU-CP that it is ready to handover the UE attached to the handover IAB node DU cell to the target IAB donor.
其它细节可参照步骤101,此处不赘述。For other details, please refer to step 101, which will not be repeated here.
步骤402,Bearer Context Setup流程。 Step 402, Bearer Context Setup process.
具体的,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Setup Request消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:UPF为UE的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。Specifically, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
接着,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Setup Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。Next, the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE. The tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
其他细节可参照步骤102和步骤103,此处不赘述。For other details, please refer to step 102 and step 103, which will not be repeated here.
步骤404,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request Acknowledge消息。Step 404: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、UE的配置信息。其中,UE的配置信息可以携带在RRCReconfiguration消息或者其他RRC消息中。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, and configuration information of the UE. Among them, the configuration information of the UE may be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message or other RRC messages.
其它细节参照步骤301,此处不赘述。For other details, refer to step 301, which will not be repeated here.
步骤405,源IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送UE Context Modification Request消息。Step 405: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU.
可选地,UE Context Modification Request消息包括以下至少一种信息:UE的配置信息以及传输动作指示信息(Transmission Action Indicator IE)。Optionally, the UE Context Modification Request message includes at least one of the following information: UE configuration information and transmission action indicator information (Transmission Action Indicator IE).
其它细节参照步骤302,此处不赘述。For other details, refer to step 302, which will not be repeated here.
步骤406,切换IAB node DU向UE发送RRCReconfiguration消息,该消息中携带UE的配置信息,以便UE根据目标IAB donor CU-CP的配置进行更新。即:UE接收到RRCReconfiguration消息后,可基于其所包括的新配置更新本地配置。Step 406: The handover IAB node DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE, which carries the configuration information of the UE, so that the UE can update according to the configuration of the target IAB donor CU-CP. That is, after the UE receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it can update the local configuration based on the new configuration included in it.
步骤407,切换IAB node DU向源IAB donor CU-CP发送UE Context Modification Response消息。Step 407: Switch the IAB node DU and send the UE Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
步骤408,执行Bearer Context Modification流程。Step 408: Execute the Bearer Context Modification process.
具体的,源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于源IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP转发隧道。Specifically, the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
随后,源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Subsequently, the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE.
具体细节可参照步骤304~步骤306,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 304 to step 306, which will not be repeated here.
步骤409,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送SN Status Transfer消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Step 409: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
其它细节参照步骤307,此处不赘述。For other details, refer to step 307, which will not be repeated here.
步骤410,目标IAB donor CU-CP执行Bearer Context Modification流程。 Step 410, the target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Modification process.
具体的,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。该消息中包括但不限于所述源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Specifically, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. The message includes but is not limited to the PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
接着,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。Next, the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
具体细节可参照步骤308~步骤309,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 308 to step 309, which will not be repeated here.
步骤411,源IAB donor CU-UP通过转发隧道向目标IAB donor CU-UP进行UE数据的转发。Step 411: The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
步骤412,UE向切换IAB node DU发送RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。Step 412: The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
具体的,UE使用与源IAB donor CU-CP对等的安全算法和密钥对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息进行安全处理后,通过源IAB donor CU-CP将RRCReconfigurationComplete消息发送到目标IAB donor CU-CP。具体细节可参照步骤311,此处不赘述。Specifically, the UE uses the security algorithm and key equivalent to the source IAB donor CU-CP to securely process the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, and then sends the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP. For specific details, please refer to step 311, which will not be repeated here.
或者,UE可基于接收到的新配置,对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息进行安全处理,例如,使用新的安全算法和密钥对RRCReconfigurationComplete消息加密。与方案一相同,切换IAB node DU接收到RRCReconfigurationComplete消息后,一个示例中,切换IAB node DU可通过源IAB donor CU-CP,将RRCReconfigurationComplete消息发送给目标IAB donor CU-CP,如图中的步骤413~步骤415所示。另一个示例中,切换IAB node DU可先将RRCReconfigurationComplete消息缓存于本地。切换IAB node DU可在对应的切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor,并且切换IAB node DU与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间建立F1接口后,再向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。如图中的步骤413’~步骤414’所示。Alternatively, the UE may perform security processing on the RRCReconfigurationComplete message based on the received new configuration, for example, use a new security algorithm and key to encrypt the RRCReconfigurationComplete message. Same as solution 1, after the handover IAB node DU receives the RRCReconfigurationComplete message, in an example, the handover IAB node DU can send the RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the target IAB donor CU-CP through the source IAB donor CU-CP, as shown in step 413 in the figure. ~ As shown in step 415. In another example, to switch the IAB node DU, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be cached locally. The switch IAB node DU can switch to the target IAB donor in the corresponding switch IAB node MT, and after the F1 interface is established between the switch IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message can be sent to the target IAB donor CU-CP . As shown in step 413' to step 414' in the figure.
步骤413,切换IAB node DU向源IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息。Step 413: Switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在UL RRC Message Transfer消息中。The RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
步骤414,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送XnAP消息。Step 414: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an XnAP message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在XnAP消息中。The RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in an XnAP message.
步骤415,目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发UE的path switch流程,以及向源IAB donor CU-CP触发UE的上下文释放流程。Step 415, the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
具体细节参照步骤314,此处不赘述。For specific details, refer to step 314, which will not be repeated here.
步骤413’,切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息,可选地,所述RRCReconfigurationComplete消息可携带在UL RRC Message Transfer消息中。Step 413', the handover IAB node DU sends a UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the RRCReconfigurationComplete message may be carried in the UL RRC Message Transfer message.
步骤414’,目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发UE的path switch流程。Step 414', the target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF.
具体细节可参照步骤312~步骤314,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 312 to step 314, which will not be repeated here.
步骤416,执行切换IAB node MT切换至目标IAB donor的流程。Step 416: Perform the process of switching the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor.
1、源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送切换请求消息(Handover Request)。切换请求消息中包括以下至少一项:切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息、以及切换IAB node DU的上下文信息。1. The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a handover request message (Handover Request) to the target IAB donor CU-CP. The handover request message includes at least one of the following: context information for switching IAB node MT, identification information for switching IAB node MT, and context information for switching IAB node DU.
2、目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Setup Request消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:UPF为切换IAB node MT的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。2. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by UPF to switch different bearers of IAB node MT.
3、目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Setup Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。3. The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface, the target IAB donor CU-UP is the switch IAB node MT different bearer The tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for switching different bearers of the IAB node MT.
4、目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor DU发送UE Context Setup Request消息。4. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor DU.
5、目标IAB donor DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UE Context Setup Response消息。5. The target IAB donor DU sends a UE Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
6、目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request Acknowledge消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息、切换IAB node MT的空口配置信息。6. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the switch IAB node MT, and the air interface configuration information of the switch IAB node MT.
7、源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor DU发送UE Context Modification Request消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:切换IAB node MT的RRCReconfiguration消息。其中,该RRCReconfiguration消息中包括切换IAB node MT的新空口配置,用于指示切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor,并根据该新空口配置更新本地配置。7. The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor DU. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: RRCReconfiguration message for handover IAB node MT. Among them, the RRCReconfiguration message includes the new air interface configuration for switching the IAB node MT, which is used to instruct the IAB node MT to switch to the target IAB donor, and to update the local configuration according to the new air interface configuration.
8、源IAB donor DU向切换IAB node MT发送RRCReconfiguration消息。切换IAB node MT接收到RRCReconfiguration消息后,执行切换流程。即:根据收到的新空口配置更新本地配置,并向目标IAB donor发起随机接入。8. The source IAB donor DU sends an RRCReconfiguration message to the handover IAB node MT. After the handover IAB node MT receives the RRCReconfiguration message, it executes the handover process. That is: update the local configuration according to the received new air interface configuration, and initiate random access to the target IAB donor.
9、源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于源IAB donor CU-UP为切换IAB node MT的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP转发隧道。其 中,步骤7和步骤9可以并行执行,顺序不限定。9. The source IAB donor CU-CP sends the Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface to switch the different bearers of the IAB node MT, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT Different bearers establish GTP forwarding tunnels corresponding to the source IAB donor CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Among them, step 7 and step 9 can be executed in parallel, and the order is not limited.
10、源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。10. The source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: switch the status information of PDCP corresponding to different bearers of IAB node MT.
11、源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送SN Status Transfer消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:源IAB donor CU-UP上切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。11. The source IAB donor CU-CP sends the SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
12、目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息,该消息中包括所述源IAB donor CU-UP上切换IAB node MT的不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。12. The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor UP, which includes the status information of the PDCP corresponding to different bearers of the source IAB donor CU-UP to switch the IAB node MT.
13、目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。13. The target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
14、源IAB donor CU-UP通过转发隧道向目标IAB donor CU-UP进行切换IAB node MT数据的转发。14. The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the IAB node MT data through the forwarding tunnel to the target IAB donor CU-UP.
15、切换IAB node MT向目标IAB donor DU发送RRC Reconfiguration Complete消息。15. The handover IAB node MT sends an RRC Reconfiguration Complete message to the target IAB donor DU.
16、目标IAB donor DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息,该消息中携带从切换IAB node MT收到的RRC Reconfiguration Complete消息。16. The target IAB donor DU sends the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP, which carries the RRC Reconfiguration Complete message received from the handover IAB node MT.
17、目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发切换IAB node MT的path switch流程,以及向源IAB donor CU-CP触发切换IAB node的上下文释放流程。17. The target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of switching IAB node MT to AMF, and triggers the context release process of switching IAB node to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
切换IAB node MT切换前的准备流程以及切换IAB node MT的切换过程中与UE的类似,具体细节可参照方案一中的实施例,此处不赘述。The preparation process before handover of IAB node MT and the handover process of handover of IAB node MT are similar to those of the UE. For specific details, please refer to the embodiment in solution 1, which will not be repeated here.
步骤417,切换IAB node DU触发与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间的F1接口建立流程。Step 417: Switching the IAB node DU triggers the F1 interface establishment process with the target IAB donor CU-CP.
具体细节可参照步骤325,此处不赘述。For specific details, refer to step 325, which will not be repeated here.
步骤418,UE的上下文建立流程。Step 418, the UE's context establishment process.
具体细节可参照步骤326,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 326, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,方案二与方案一的区别在于:本方案中,UE先执行切换,然后切换IAB node再执行切换。而方案一中,UE和切换IAB node并行执行切换准备过程,切换IAB node将UE的配置信息发送给UE后,再执行切换IAB node MT的切换。It should be noted that the difference between the second solution and the first solution is that: in this solution, the UE performs handover first, and then switches the IAB node before performing the handover. In solution 1, the UE and the handover IAB node perform the handover preparation process in parallel. After the handover IAB node sends the configuration information of the UE to the UE, the handover of the handover IAB node MT is performed.
方案三third solution
可选地,在本实施例中,源IAB donor将切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor后,再将附着于切换IAB node DU小区的UE切换到目标IAB donor。其中,切换IAB node MT的切换流程可参照上文,此处不赘述。Optionally, in this embodiment, the source IAB donor switches the handover IAB node MT to the target IAB donor, and then switches the UE attached to the handover IAB node DU cell to the target IAB donor. Among them, the switching process of switching IAB node MT can refer to the above, and it will not be repeated here.
具体的,切换IAB node MT切换到目标IAB donor,并完成切换IAB node DU与目标IAB donor CU-CP之间的F1接口建立过程后,目标IAB donor CU-CP可获取到切换IAB node DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区标识(新CGI)和对应的旧小区标识(旧CGI),具体获取方式可参照方案一,此处不赘述。接着,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP指示切换IAB node DU服务的小区的标识变更信息,该信息包括小区更新前后的CGI(新CGI和对应的旧CGI)。示例性的,小区标识变更信息可携带在节点配置更新(NG-RAN Node  Configuration Update)消息中由目标IAB donor CU-CP发送到源IAB donor CU-CP。Specifically, after switching the IAB node MT to the target IAB donor, and completing the F1 interface establishment process between the switching IAB node DU and the target IAB donor CU-CP, the target IAB donor CU-CP can obtain the services of the switching IAB node DU. The new cell identity (new CGI) and the corresponding old cell identity (old CGI) of at least one cell can be obtained by referring to Scheme 1, which will not be repeated here. Next, the target IAB donor CU-CP instructs the source IAB donor CU-CP to switch the identity change information of the cell served by the IAB node DU, and the information includes the CGI before and after the cell update (the new CGI and the corresponding old CGI). Exemplarily, the cell identity change information may be carried in a node configuration update (NG-RAN Node Configuration Update) message and sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
源IAB donor CU-CP可更新UE的标识信息,即,将UE的标识信息(旧CGI和C-RNTI)更新为(新CGI和C-RNTI)。The source IAB donor CU-CP can update the identification information of the UE, that is, update the identification information (old CGI and C-RNTI) of the UE to (new CGI and C-RNTI).
接着UE执行切换流程,具体的:Then the UE executes the handover procedure, specifically:
如图12所示,其示例性示出了一种UE切换方法的流程示意图,在图12中:As shown in FIG. 12, which exemplarily shows a schematic flowchart of a UE handover method, in FIG. 12:
步骤501,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request消息。Step 501: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息包括以下至少一种信息:UE的标识信息(新CGI和C-RNTI)与UE的上下文信息。Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: identification information (new CGI and C-RNTI) of the UE and context information of the UE.
步骤502,Bearer Context Setup流程。Step 502, Bearer Context Setup process.
具体的,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Setup Request消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:UPF为UE的不同承载分配的NG接口隧道标识信息。Specifically, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Setup Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: NG interface tunnel identification information allocated by the UPF for different bearers of the UE.
接着,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Setup Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括以下至少一种信息:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在NG接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在F1接口分配的隧道标识信息、目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。Next, the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Setup Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes at least one of the following information: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the NG interface for the different bearers of the UE, and the target IAB donor CU-UP is the tunnel identification information allocated on the F1 interface for the different bearers of the UE. The tunnel identification information and the target IAB donor CU-UP are the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
其他细节可参照步骤102和步骤103,此处不赘述。For other details, please refer to step 102 and step 103, which will not be repeated here.
步骤503,目标IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Handover Request Acknowledge消息。Step 503: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Handover Request Acknowledge message to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息。Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE.
步骤504,执行Bearer Context Modification流程。Step 504: Execute the Bearer Context Modification process.
具体的,源IAB donor CU-CP向源IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:目标IAB donor CU-UP为UE不同承载在Xn接口分配的转发隧道标识信息,用于源IAB donor CU-UP为UE的不同承载建立从源IAB donor CU-UP到目标IAB donor CU-UP对应的GTP转发隧道。Specifically, the source IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the source IAB donor CU-UP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: the target IAB donor CU-UP is the forwarding tunnel identification information allocated on the Xn interface for different bearers of the UE, used for the source IAB donor CU-UP to establish the slave IAB donor for different bearers of the UE CU-UP to the target IAB donor CU-UP corresponding GTP forwarding tunnel.
随后,源IAB donor CU-UP向源IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification Response消息。可选地,该消息中包括但不限于:UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Subsequently, the source IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the source IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE.
具体细节可参照步骤304~步骤306,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 304 to step 306, which will not be repeated here.
步骤505,源IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送SN Status Transfer消息。可选地,该消息包括但不限于:源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Step 505: The source IAB donor CU-CP sends an SN Status Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP. Optionally, the message includes but is not limited to: PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
其它细节参照步骤307,此处不赘述。For other details, refer to step 307, which will not be repeated here.
步骤506,目标IAB donor CU-CP执行Bearer Context Modification流程。 Step 506, the target IAB donor CU-CP executes the Bearer Context Modification process.
具体的,目标IAB donor CU-CP向目标IAB donor CU-UP发送Bearer Context Modification Request消息。该消息中包括但不限于所述源IAB donor CU-UP上UE不同承载对应的PDCP的状态信息。Specifically, the target IAB donor CU-CP sends a Bearer Context Modification Request message to the target IAB donor CU-UP. The message includes but is not limited to the PDCP status information corresponding to different bearers of the UE on the source IAB donor CU-UP.
接着,目标IAB donor CU-UP向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送Bearer Context Modification  Response消息。Next, the target IAB donor CU-UP sends a Bearer Context Modification Response message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
具体细节可参照步骤308~步骤309,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 308 to step 309, which will not be repeated here.
步骤507,源IAB donor CU-UP通过转发隧道向目标IAB donor CU-UP进行UE数据的转发。Step 507: The source IAB donor CU-UP forwards the UE data to the target IAB donor CU-UP through the forwarding tunnel.
步骤508,UE的上下文建立流程。Step 508: Context establishment process of the UE.
具体细节可参照步骤326,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to step 326, which will not be repeated here.
步骤509,目标IAB donor CU-CP向切换IAB node DU发送UE Context Modification Request消息。Step 509: The target IAB donor CU-CP sends a UE Context Modification Request message to the handover IAB node DU.
可选地,UE Context Modification Request消息中包括目标IAB donor CU-CP为UE分配的新配置信息,该新配置信息可以携带在RRCReconfiguration消息中。Optionally, the UE Context Modification Request message includes new configuration information allocated by the target IAB donor CU-CP for the UE, and the new configuration information may be carried in the RRCReconfiguration message.
步骤510,切换IAB node DU向UE发送RRCReconfiguration消息。Step 510: Switch the IAB node DU to send an RRCReconfiguration message to the UE.
需要说明的是,在UE未收到目标IAB donor CU-CP发送的新配置之前,UE使用的配置信息一直是源IAB donor CU-CP分配的,即:UE只会使用源IAB donor CU-CP配置的安全算法和密钥对发送/收到的RRC消息进行安全处理。因此,为了让UE能够正常安全解析目标IAB donor CU-CP生成的RRCReconfiguration消息,则需要目标IAB donor CU-CP使用源IAB donor CU-CP使用的安全算法和密钥对该消息进行安全处理后发送。即:在步骤601中,源IAB donor CU-CP还需要将其使用的安全算法和密钥发送到目标IAB donor CU-CP。It should be noted that before the UE receives the new configuration sent by the target IAB donor CU-CP, the configuration information used by the UE is always allocated by the source IAB donor CU-CP, that is, the UE will only use the source IAB donor CU-CP The configured security algorithm and key perform security processing on sent/received RRC messages. Therefore, in order for the UE to safely parse the RRCReconfiguration message generated by the target IAB donor CU-CP, the target IAB donor CU-CP needs to use the security algorithm and key used by the source IAB donor CU-CP to securely process the message and send it. . That is, in step 601, the source IAB donor CU-CP also needs to send the security algorithm and key used by it to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
步骤511,UE向切换IAB node DU发送RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。Step 511: The UE sends an RRCReconfigurationComplete message to the handover IAB node DU.
步骤512,切换IAB node DU向目标IAB donor CU-CP发送UL RRC Message Transfer消息。Step 512: Switch the IAB node DU and send the UL RRC Message Transfer message to the target IAB donor CU-CP.
其中,UL RRC Message Transfer消息中携带RRCReconfigurationComplete消息。Among them, the UL RRC Message Transfer message carries the RRCReconfigurationComplete message.
步骤513,目标IAB donor CU-CP向AMF触发UE的path switch流程,以及向源IAB donor CU-CP触发UE的上下文释放流程。Step 513: The target IAB donor CU-CP triggers the path switch process of the UE to the AMF, and triggers the UE context release process to the source IAB donor CU-CP.
具体细节可参照方案一和方案二,此处不赘述。For specific details, please refer to Scheme 1 and Scheme 2, which will not be repeated here.
可选地,如图5所示为两跳回传链路场景,即,切换IAB node的父节点为源IAB donor,切换IAB node的子节点为UE为例进行说明,对于多跳场景,例如场景二,即图2所示的场景下,切换IAB node与附着于其下的其它IAB node以及附着于其它IAB node下的UE的切换过程可包括:在切换准备过程中,源IAB donor向目标IAB donor发送拓扑信息,其中,拓扑信息用于描述相邻节点之间的父子关系,也就是说,拓扑信息可以用于指示切换IAB donor与直接附着于其下的子节点之间的父子关系,还可用于指示各子节点之间的父子关系。示例性的,图2场景中,拓扑信息包括切换IAB node和IAB node A的父子关系,以及IAB node A与UE的父子关系。或者,拓扑信息包括切换IAB node和IAB node A的父子关系,以及IAB node A和IAB node B的父子关系,以及IAB node B和UE的父子关系。Optionally, as shown in Figure 5 is a two-hop backhaul link scenario, that is, the parent node of the switching IAB node is the source IAB donor, and the child node of the IAB node is switched to the UE as an example. For the multi-hop scenario, for example, Scenario two, that is, in the scenario shown in Figure 2, the handover process of switching between an IAB node and other IAB nodes attached to it and UEs attached to other IAB nodes may include: in the handover preparation process, the source IAB donor to the target The IAB donor sends topology information, where the topology information is used to describe the parent-child relationship between neighboring nodes, that is, the topology information can be used to instruct to switch the parent-child relationship between the IAB donor and the child nodes directly attached to it. It can also be used to indicate the parent-child relationship between child nodes. Exemplarily, in the scenario in FIG. 2, the topology information includes the parent-child relationship between switching IAB node and IAB node A, and the parent-child relationship between IAB node A and UE. Alternatively, the topology information includes the parent-child relationship between switching IAB node and IAB node A, the parent-child relationship between IAB node A and IAB node B, and the parent-child relationship between IAB node B and UE.
可选地,拓扑信息可携带在Handover Request与UE的上下文信息、其它IAB node的上下文信息和/或切换IAB node的上下文信息一起发送给目标IAB donor。Optionally, the topology information can be carried in the Handover Request and sent to the target IAB donor together with the context information of the UE, the context information of other IAB nodes, and/or the context information of the handover IAB node.
可选地,多跳场景下,切换IAB node与附着于其下的其他IAB node以及附着于其他IAB  node下的UE的切换过程还可包括:在切换准备过程中,源IAB node向目标IAB donor发送以下至少一种信息:UE的上下文信息、UE的标识信息、切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息、切换IAB node DU的上下文信息、其他IAB node MT的上下文信息、其他IAB node MT的标识信息、其他IAB node DU的上下文信息。其中,UE的上下文信息、UE的标识信息、切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、切换IAB node MT的标识信息以及切换IAB node DU的上下文信息在方案一的步骤101中有描述,这里就不再赘述。其中,其他IAB node MT的上下文信息就类似于与切换IAB node MT的上下文信息、其他IAB node MT的标识信息就类似于切换IAB node MT的标识信息、其他IAB node DU的上下文信息就类似于切换IAB node DU的上下文信息,这里也不再赘述。多跳场景下的IAB node(包括切换IAB node和其它IAB node)与UE的切换步骤可参照方案一、方案二或方案三,此处不赘述。Optionally, in a multi-hop scenario, the handover process of switching between an IAB node and other IAB nodes attached to it and UEs attached to other IAB nodes may also include: in the handover preparation process, the source IAB node to the target IAB donor Send at least one of the following information: UE context information, UE identification information, handover IAB node MT context information, handover IAB node MT identification information, handover IAB node DU context information, other IAB node MT context information, others IAB node MT identification information, other IAB node DU context information. Among them, the context information of the UE, the identification information of the UE, the context information of the handover IAB node MT, the identity information of the handover IAB node MT, and the context information of the handover IAB node DU are described in step 101 of the scheme 1, and will not be repeated here. . Among them, the context information of other IAB node MT is similar to the context information of handover IAB node MT, the identification information of other IAB node MT is similar to the identification information of handover IAB node MT, and the context information of other IAB node DU is similar to handover. The context information of IAB node DU will not be repeated here. For the handover steps of the IAB node (including handover of IAB nodes and other IAB nodes) and the UE in the multi-hop scenario, refer to Solution 1, Solution 2, or Solution 3, which will not be repeated here.
上述主要从各个网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,IAB donor和IAB node为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solution provided by the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between various network elements. It is understandable that in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, IAB donor and IAB node include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对IAB donor和IAB node进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiment of the present application may divide the IAB donor and the IAB node into functional modules according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
一个示例中,图13示出了上述实施例中所涉及的源IAB donor100的一种可能的结构示意图,如图13所示,源IAB donor100可以包括:接收模块101、确定模块102以及发送模块103。其中,接收模块101可用于“获取信号质量信息”的步骤,例如,该模块可以用于支持源IAB donor执行上述方法实施例中的步骤101,步骤202、步骤401以及步骤501。确定模块102可用于“基于测量结果,确定将IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor”的步骤,例如,该模块可以用于支持源IAB donor执行上述方法实施例中的步骤101,步骤202、步骤401以及步骤501。发送模块103可用于“向目标IAB donor发送IAB节点的上下文和IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文”的步骤,例如,该模块可以用于支持源IAB donor执行上述方法实施例中的步骤101,步骤202、步骤401以及步骤501。In an example, FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the source IAB donor 100 involved in the foregoing embodiment. As shown in FIG. 13, the source IAB donor 100 may include: a receiving module 101, a determining module 102, and a sending module 103 . Wherein, the receiving module 101 can be used for the step of "acquiring signal quality information". For example, this module can be used for supporting the source IAB donor to execute step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 501 in the foregoing method embodiment. The determining module 102 can be used to "determine the step of switching the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result". For example, this module can be used to support the source IAB donor to perform step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 401 in the above method embodiment. Step 501. The sending module 103 can be used for the step of "sending the context of the IAB node and the context of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor". For example, this module can be used to support the source IAB donor to perform step 101 in the above method embodiment, Step 202, step 401, and step 501.
一个示例中,图14示出了上述实施例中所涉及的IAB node200的一种可能的结构示意图,如图14所示,IAB node200可以包括:发送模块201、接收模块202。其中,发送模块201可用于“向源IAB donor发送测量结果”的步骤,例如,该模块可以用于支持IAB node执行上述方法实施例中的步骤101,步骤202、步骤401以及步骤501。接收模块202可用于“接收源IAB donor发送的IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息”的步骤,例如,该模块 可以用于支持IAB node执行上述方法实施例中的步骤302、步骤315、步骤405、步骤416、步骤503以及步骤509。发送模块201还可以用于“向至少一个子节点发送第二配置信息”例如,该模块可以用于支持IAB node执行上述方法实施例中的步骤303、步骤406、步骤510。In an example, FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the IAB node 200 involved in the foregoing embodiment. As shown in FIG. 14, the IAB node 200 may include: a sending module 201 and a receiving module 202. Wherein, the sending module 201 can be used for the step of “sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor”. For example, this module can be used for supporting the IAB node to execute step 101, step 202, step 401, and step 501 in the foregoing method embodiment. The receiving module 202 may be used for the step of "receiving the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the source IAB donor and the second configuration information required for the at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor", For example, this module can be used to support the IAB node to execute step 302, step 315, step 405, step 416, step 503, and step 509 in the foregoing method embodiment. The sending module 201 may also be used to “send the second configuration information to at least one child node”. For example, the module may be used to support the IAB node to perform step 303, step 406, and step 510 in the foregoing method embodiment.
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种装置。如图15所示:The following describes a device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 15:
该装置包括处理模块301和通信模块302。可选的,该装置还包括存储模块303。处理模块301、通信模块302和存储模块303通过通信总线相连。The device includes a processing module 301 and a communication module 302. Optionally, the device further includes a storage module 303. The processing module 301, the communication module 302, and the storage module 303 are connected by a communication bus.
通信模块302可以是具有收发功能的装置,用于与其他网络设备或者通信网络进行通信。The communication module 302 may be a device with a transceiving function, and is used to communicate with other network equipment or a communication network.
存储模块303可以包括一个或者多个存储器,存储器可以是一个或者多个设备、电路中用于存储程序或者数据的器件。The storage module 303 may include one or more memories, and the memories may be devices for storing programs or data in one or more devices or circuits.
存储模块303可以独立存在,通过通信总线与处理模块301相连。存储模块也可以与处理模块301集成在一起。The storage module 303 can exist independently and is connected to the processing module 301 through a communication bus. The storage module can also be integrated with the processing module 301.
装置300可以用于网络设备、电路、硬件组件或者芯片中。The apparatus 300 can be used in a network device, a circuit, a hardware component, or a chip.
装置300可以是本申请实施例中的IAB node,例如切换IAB node。可选的,装置300的通信模块302可以包括IAB node的天线和收发机。可选的,通信模块302还可以包括输出设备和输入设备。The device 300 may be an IAB node in the embodiment of the present application, for example, switching IAB node. Optionally, the communication module 302 of the device 300 may include an antenna and a transceiver of an IAB node. Optionally, the communication module 302 may also include an output device and an input device.
装置300可以是本申请实施例中的IAB node中的芯片。通信模块302可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等。可选的,存储模块可以存储IAB node侧的方法的计算机执行指令,以使处理模块301执行上述实施例中IAB node侧的方法。存储模块303可以是寄存器、缓存或者RAM等,存储模块303可以和处理模块301集成在一起;存储模块303可以是ROM或者可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,存储模块303可以与处理模块301相独立。可选的,随着无线通信技术的发展,收发机可以被集成在装置300上,例如通信模块302集成了收发机202。The device 300 may be a chip in the IAB node in the embodiment of the present application. The communication module 302 may be an input or output interface, pin or circuit, or the like. Optionally, the storage module may store a computer-executed instruction of the method on the IAB node side, so that the processing module 301 executes the method on the IAB node side in the foregoing embodiment. The storage module 303 can be a register, a cache or RAM, etc. The storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301; the storage module 303 can be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301. The processing module 301 is independent. Optionally, with the development of wireless communication technology, the transceiver may be integrated on the device 300, for example, the communication module 302 integrates the transceiver 202.
当装置300是本申请实施例中的IAB node或者IAB node中的芯片时,装置300可以实现上述实施例中切换IAB node执行的方法。When the device 300 is the IAB node or the chip in the IAB node in the embodiment of the present application, the device 300 can implement the method for switching the execution of the IAB node in the foregoing embodiment.
装置300可以是本申请实施例中的IAB donor,例如源IAB donor和目标IAB donor。可选的,装置300的通信模块302可以包括IAB donor的天线和收发机。通信模块302还可以包括IAB donor的网络接口。The device 300 may be the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application, for example, the source IAB donor and the target IAB donor. Optionally, the communication module 302 of the device 300 may include an antenna and a transceiver of an IAB donor. The communication module 302 may also include a network interface of the IAB donor.
装置300可以是本申请实施例中的IAB donor中的芯片。通信模块302可以是输入或者输出接口、管脚或者电路等。可选的,存储模块可以存储源IAB donor侧的方法的计算机执行指令,以使处理模块301执行上述实施例中源IAB donor侧的方法。存储模块303可以是寄存器、缓存或者RAM等,存储模块303可以和处理模块301集成在一起;存储模块303可以是ROM或者可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,存储模块303可以与处理模块301相独立。可选的,随着无线通信技术的发展,收发机可以被集成在装置300上,例如通信模块302集成了收发机103,网络接口104。The device 300 may be a chip in the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application. The communication module 302 may be an input or output interface, pin or circuit, or the like. Optionally, the storage module may store a computer-executed instruction of the method on the source IAB donor side, so that the processing module 301 executes the method on the source IAB donor side in the foregoing embodiment. The storage module 303 can be a register, a cache or RAM, etc. The storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301; the storage module 303 can be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, and the storage module 303 can be integrated with the processing module 301. The processing module 301 is independent. Optionally, with the development of wireless communication technology, the transceiver may be integrated on the device 300, for example, the communication module 302 integrates the transceiver 103 and the network interface 104.
当装置500是本申请实施例中的IAB donor或者IAB donor中的芯片时,可以实现上述实施例中IAB donor执行的方法。When the device 500 is the IAB donor in the embodiment of the present application or the chip in the IAB donor, the method executed by the IAB donor in the foregoing embodiment can be implemented.
其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant content of the steps involved in the above method embodiments can be cited in the functional description of the corresponding functional module, which will not be repeated here.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序包含至少一段代码,该至少一段代码可由IAB node执行,以控制IAB node用以实现上述方法实施例。Based on the same technical concept, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by IAB node to control The IAB node is used to implement the above method embodiments.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序包含至少一段代码,该至少一段代码可由IAB donor执行,以控制IAB donor用以实现上述方法实施例。Based on the same technical concept, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by the IAB donor to control The IAB donor is used to implement the above method embodiments.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序,当该计算机程序被IAB node执行时,用以实现上述方法实施例。Based on the same technical concept, the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program, which is used to implement the foregoing method embodiment when the computer program is executed by the IAB node.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序,当该计算机程序被IAB donor执行时,用以实现上述方法实施例。Based on the same technical concept, the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the above method embodiment when the computer program is executed by the IAB donor.
所述程序可以全部或者部分存储在与处理器封装在一起的存储介质上,也可以部分或者全部存储在不与处理器封装在一起的存储器上。The program may be stored in whole or in part on a storage medium packaged with the processor, and may also be stored in part or in a memory not packaged with the processor.
基于相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种处理器,该处理器用以实现上述方法实施例。上述处理器可以为芯片。Based on the same technical concept, an embodiment of the present application further provides a processor, which is configured to implement the foregoing method embodiment. The above-mentioned processor may be a chip.
结合本申请实施例公开内容所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以硬件的方式来实现,也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(Read Only Memory,ROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM,EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于网络设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于网络设备中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in combination with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present application may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented in a manner in which a processor executes software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, which can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (Read Only Memory, ROM), and erasable programmable read-only memory ( Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, so that the processor can read information from the storage medium and can write information to the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium may also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and the storage medium may be located in the ASIC. In addition, the ASIC can be located in a network device. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the network device.
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,在上述一个或多个示例中,本申请实施例所描述的功能可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以将这些功能存储在计算机可读介质中或者作为计算机可读介质上的一个或多个指令或代码进行传输。计算机可读介质包括计算机存储介质和通信介质,其中通信介质包括便于从一个地方向另一个地方传送计算机程序的任何介质。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。Those skilled in the art should be aware that, in one or more of the foregoing examples, the functions described in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented by software, these functions can be stored in a computer-readable medium or transmitted as one or more instructions or codes on the computer-readable medium. The computer-readable medium includes a computer storage medium and a communication medium, where the communication medium includes any medium that facilitates the transfer of a computer program from one place to another. The storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a general-purpose or special-purpose computer.
上面结合附图对本申请的实施例进行了描述,但是本申请并不局限于上述的具体实施方式,上述的具体实施方式仅仅是示意性的,而不是限制性的,本领域的普通技术人员在本申请的启示下,在不脱离本申请宗旨和权利要求所保护的范围情况下,还可做出很多形式,均属于本申请的保护之内。The embodiments of the application are described above with reference to the accompanying drawings, but the application is not limited to the above-mentioned specific embodiments. The above-mentioned specific embodiments are only illustrative and not restrictive. Those of ordinary skill in the art are Under the enlightenment of this application, many forms can be made without departing from the purpose of this application and the scope of protection of the claims, all of which fall within the protection of this application.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种切换方法,其特征在于,应用于源接入回传一体化宿主IAB donor,所述方法包括:A handover method, characterized in that it is applied to a source access backhaul integrated host IAB donor, and the method includes:
    接收IAB节点上报的测量结果,所述测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,所述源小区属于所述源IAB donor,所述目标小区属于目标IAB donor;Receive the measurement result reported by the IAB node, where the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, wherein the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell belongs to Target IAB donor;
    基于所述测量结果,确定将所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor,则向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息;其中,所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点。Based on the measurement result, it is determined to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor, then the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor; where At least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息,以及所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;Receive the first configuration information required by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the target IAB donor, and the second configuration required by the at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor information;
    向所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点发送所述第二配置信息,以及,向所述IAB节点发送所述第一配置信息。Sending the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sending the first configuration information to the IAB node.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,所述第二配置信息包括以下至少之一:The method according to claim 2, wherein if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the second configuration information includes at least one of the following:
    与所述目标IAB donor对等的所述UE的PDCP层的配置信息、所述UE和所述目标IAB donor之间使用的安全算法、所述UE和所述目标IAB donor之间使用的安全密钥对应的NCC值。The configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE that is equivalent to the target IAB donor, the security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor, and the security secret used between the UE and the target IAB donor The NCC value corresponding to the key.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,其中,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein:
    所述IAB节点的上下文信息与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中;The context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message;
    或者,or,
    所述IAB节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中,所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在n个第二消息中,所述n个第二消息与所述至少一个子节点一一对应,n等于所述至少一个子节点的个数。The context information of the IAB node is carried in a first message, and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node is carried in n second messages, and the n second messages are the same as the at least one child node. One correspondence, n is equal to the number of the at least one child node.
  5. 根据权利要求1至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,所述向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the context information of the IAB node and the target IAB donor are sent to the target IAB donor. The context information of at least one child node of the IAB node also includes:
    向所述目标IAB donor发送所述UE的标识信息;Sending the identification information of the UE to the target IAB donor;
    所述标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的小区所使用的小区全球标识CGI,以及,所述UE在所述IAB节点的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI。The identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification C-RNTI of the UE in the cell of the IAB node.
  6. 根据权利要求1至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that:
    若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括其它IAB节点,所述其它IAB节点的上下文信息包括所述其它IAB节点的分布式单元DU的上下文信息;If at least one child node of the IAB node includes another IAB node, the context information of the other IAB node includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB node;
    所述DU的上下文信息包括以下至少之一:The context information of the DU includes at least one of the following:
    DU的标识信息、DU服务的至少一个小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本、DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。The identification information of the DU, the identification CGI of at least one cell served by the DU, the physical cell identification PCI of the at least one cell served by the DU, the RRC version supported by the DU, and the indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  7. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the sending context information of the IAB node and context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor further comprises :
    向所述目标IAB donor发送拓扑信息,所述拓扑信息用于指示所述IAB节点与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点之间和/或所述IAB节点的多个子节点之间的拓扑关系。Send topology information to the target IAB donor, where the topology information is used to indicate a topology relationship between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
  8. 根据权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the method further comprises:
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;Receiving a new cell global identity and an old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor;
    向所述IAB节点发送所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;Sending the new cell global identity and the old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node;
    或者,or,
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;Receiving the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor;
    向所述IAB节点发送所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;Sending the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node;
    其中,所述新小区全球标识为所述IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;所述旧小区全球标识为所述IAB节点接入所述源IAB donor使用的是小区全球标识。Wherein, the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the old cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
  9. 一种切换方法,其特征在于,应用于接入回转一体化IAB节点,所述方法包括:A handover method, which is characterized in that it is applied to access a turning integrated IAB node, and the method includes:
    向所述源IAB donor发送测量结果;Sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor;
    接收所述源IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点;Receive the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor and the second configuration information required for at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor sent by the source IAB donor ; At least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes;
    向所述至少一个子节点发送所述第二配置信息。Sending the second configuration information to the at least one child node.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    获取所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识CGI;Acquiring a new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node;
    其中,所述新小区全球标识为所述IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;所述IAB节点接入所述源IAB donor使用的是旧小区全球标识。The global identifier of the new cell is the global identifier of the cell used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the global identifier of the old cell used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein after the obtaining the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node, the method further comprises:
    向所述目标IAB donor发送指示消息,所述指示消息包括所述DU服务的至少一个小区的旧小区全球标识和新小区全球标识。Send an indication message to the target IAB donor, where the indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示消息还包括所述DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。The method according to claim 11, wherein the indication message further includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述至少一个子节点包括UE,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein if the at least one child node includes a UE, the method further comprises:
    所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor,并接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述UE的标识信息;The IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the identification information of the UE sent by the target IAB donor;
    其中,所述UE的标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的DU服务的小区的旧小区全球标识和所述UE在所述DU服务的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI;Wherein, the identification information of the UE includes the old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU;
    或者,or,
    所述UE的标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的DU服务的小区的新小区全球标识和所述UE在所述DU服务的小区中的C-RNTI。The identification information of the UE includes the global identity of the new cell of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
  14. 根据权利要求9至13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,若所述至少一个子节点包括UE,所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 9 to 13, wherein if the at least one child node includes a UE, before the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, the method further comprises:
    接收所述源IAB donor发送的所述目标IAB donor为所述UE分配的F1接口的标识,所述F1接口为所述IAB节点和目标IAB donor之间的接口。Receiving the identifier of the F1 interface allocated by the target IAB donor for the UE from the source IAB donor, where the F1 interface is an interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
  15. 一种切换装置,其特征在于,应用于源接入回传一体化宿主IAB donor,所述装置包括:A handover device, characterized in that it is applied to a source access backhaul integrated host IAB donor, and the device includes:
    存储器和处理器,所述存储器和处理器耦合,A memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled,
    所述存储器存储有程序指令,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The memory stores program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    接收IAB节点上报的测量结果,所述测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,所述源小区属于所述源IAB donor,所述目标小区属于目标IAB donor;Receive the measurement result reported by the IAB node, where the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, wherein the source cell belongs to the source IAB donor, and the target cell belongs to Target IAB donor;
    基于所述测量结果,确定将所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor,则向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息;其中,所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点。Based on the measurement result, it is determined to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor, then the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor; where At least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的装置,其特征在于,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The device according to claim 15, wherein when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息,以及所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;Receive the first configuration information required by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor from the target IAB donor, and the second configuration required by the at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor information;
    向所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点发送所述第二配置信息,以及,向所述IAB节点发送所述第一配置信息。Sending the second configuration information to at least one child node of the IAB node, and sending the first configuration information to the IAB node.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,所述第二配置信息包括以下至少之一:The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the second configuration information includes at least one of the following:
    与所述目标IAB donor对等的所述UE的PDCP层的配置信息、所述UE和所述目标IAB donor之间使用的安全算法、所述UE和所述目标IAB donor之间使用的安全密钥对应的NCC值。The configuration information of the PDCP layer of the UE that is equivalent to the target IAB donor, the security algorithm used between the UE and the target IAB donor, and the security secret used between the UE and the target IAB donor The NCC value corresponding to the key.
  18. 根据权利要求15至17任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,其中,The device according to any one of claims 15 to 17, wherein:
    所述IAB节点的上下文信息与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中;The context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node are carried in the first message;
    或者,or,
    所述IAB节点的上下文信息携带在第一消息中,所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息携带在n个第二消息中,所述n个第二消息与所述至少一个子节点一一对应,n等于所述至少一个子节点的个数。The context information of the IAB node is carried in a first message, and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node is carried in n second messages, and the n second messages are the same as the at least one child node. One correspondence, n is equal to the number of the at least one child node.
  19. 根据权利要求15至18任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括UE,所述向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The apparatus according to any one of claims 15 to 18, wherein if at least one child node of the IAB node includes a UE, the context information and the context information of the IAB node are sent to the target IAB donor. The context information of at least one child node of the IAB node, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, cause the switching device to perform the following steps:
    向所述目标IAB donor发送所述UE的标识信息;Sending the identification information of the UE to the target IAB donor;
    所述标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的小区所使用的小区全球标识CGI,以及,所述UE在所述IAB节点的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI。The identification information includes the cell global identification CGI used by the UE to access the cell of the IAB node, and the cell radio network temporary identification C-RNTI of the UE in the cell of the IAB node.
  20. 根据权利要求15至19任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to any one of claims 15 to 19, characterized in that:
    若所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括其它IAB节点,所述其它IAB节点的上下文信息包括所述其它IAB节点的分布式单元DU的上下文信息;If at least one child node of the IAB node includes another IAB node, the context information of the other IAB node includes the context information of the distributed unit DU of the other IAB node;
    所述DU的上下文信息包括以下至少之一:The context information of the DU includes at least one of the following:
    DU的标识信息、DU服务的至少一个小区的标识CGI、DU服务的至少一个小区的物理小区标识PCI、DU支持的RRC版本、DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。The identification information of the DU, the identification CGI of at least one cell served by the DU, the physical cell identification PCI of the at least one cell served by the DU, the RRC version supported by the DU, and the indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  21. 根据权利要求15至20任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The apparatus according to any one of claims 15 to 20, wherein the sending the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node to the target IAB donor, the When the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    向所述目标IAB donor发送拓扑信息,所述拓扑信息用于指示所述IAB节点与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点之间和/或所述IAB节点的多个子节点之间的拓扑关系。Send topology information to the target IAB donor, where the topology information is used to indicate a topology relationship between the IAB node and at least one child node of the IAB node and/or between multiple child nodes of the IAB node.
  22. 根据权利要求15至21任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The device according to any one of claims 15 to 21, wherein when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;Receiving a new cell global identity and an old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor;
    向所述IAB节点发送所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识和旧小区全球标识;Sending the new cell global identity and the old cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node;
    或者,or,
    接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;Receiving the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node sent by the target IAB donor;
    向所述IAB节点发送所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识;Sending the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node to the IAB node;
    其中,所述新小区全球标识为所述IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;所述旧小区全球标识为所述IAB节点接入所述源IAB donor使用的是小区全球标识。Wherein, the new cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the old cell global identifier is the cell global identifier used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
  23. 一种切换装置,其特征在于,应用于接入回转一体化IAB节点,所述装置包括:A handover device, which is characterized in that it is applied to access a turn integrated IAB node, and the device includes:
    存储器和处理器,所述存储器和处理器耦合,A memory and a processor, the memory and the processor are coupled,
    所述存储器存储有程序指令,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The memory stores program instructions, and when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    向所述源IAB donor发送测量结果;Sending the measurement result to the source IAB donor;
    接收所述源IAB donor发送的所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点;Receive the first configuration information required for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor and the second configuration information required for at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor sent by the source IAB donor ; At least one child node of the IAB node includes user equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes;
    向所述至少一个子节点发送所述第二配置信息。Sending the second configuration information to the at least one child node.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The device according to claim 23, wherein when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device executes the following steps:
    获取所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识CGI;Acquiring a new cell global identity CGI of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node;
    其中,所述新小区全球标识为所述IAB节点切换到目标IAB donor使用的小区全球标识;所述IAB节点接入所述源IAB donor使用的是旧小区全球标识。The global identifier of the new cell is the global identifier of the cell used by the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor; the global identifier of the old cell used by the IAB node to access the source IAB donor.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置在获取所述IAB节点的DU服务的至少一个小区的新小区全球标识之后,执行如下步骤:The device according to claim 24, wherein when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the handover device, after acquiring the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU of the IAB node, Perform the following steps:
    向所述目标IAB donor发送指示消息,所述指示消息包括所述DU服务的至少一个小区的旧小区全球标识和新小区全球标识。Send an indication message to the target IAB donor, where the indication message includes the old cell global identity and the new cell global identity of at least one cell served by the DU.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的装置,其特征在于,所述指示消息还包括所述DU服务的至少一个小区是否被激活的指示信息。The apparatus according to claim 25, wherein the indication message further includes indication information of whether at least one cell served by the DU is activated.
  27. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述至少一个子节点包括UE,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The device according to claim 24, wherein if the at least one child node includes a UE, when the program instructions are executed by the processor, the switching device is caused to perform the following steps:
    所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor,并接收所述目标IAB donor发送的所述UE的标识信息;The IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, and receives the identification information of the UE sent by the target IAB donor;
    其中,所述UE的标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的DU服务的小区的旧小区 全球标识和所述UE在所述DU服务的小区中的小区无线网络临时标识C-RNTI;Wherein, the identification information of the UE includes the old cell global identity of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the cell radio network temporary identity C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU;
    或者,or,
    所述UE的标识信息包括所述UE接入所述IAB节点的DU服务的小区的新小区全球标识和所述UE在所述DU服务的小区中的C-RNTI。The identification information of the UE includes the global identity of the new cell of the cell served by the DU of the IAB node and the C-RNTI of the UE in the cell served by the DU.
  28. 根据权利要求23至27任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,若所述至少一个子节点包括UE,所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor之前,所述程序指令被所述处理器运行时,使得所述切换装置执行如下步骤:The apparatus according to any one of claims 23 to 27, wherein if the at least one child node includes a UE, before the IAB node switches to the target IAB donor, the program instructions are executed by the processor During operation, the switching device is caused to perform the following steps:
    接收所述源IAB donor发送的所述目标IAB donor为所述UE分配的F1接口的标识,所述F1接口为所述IAB节点和目标IAB donor之间的接口。Receiving the identifier of the F1 interface allocated by the target IAB donor for the UE from the source IAB donor, where the F1 interface is an interface between the IAB node and the target IAB donor.
  29. 一种切换系统,其特征在于,包括源接入回传一体化宿主IAB donor、目标IAB donor、IAB节点以及所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点,其中,所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点包括用户设备UE和/或其它IAB节点;A handover system, characterized in that it includes a source access backhaul integrated host IAB donor, a target IAB donor, an IAB node, and at least one child node of the IAB node, wherein at least one child node of the IAB node includes User equipment UE and/or other IAB nodes;
    所述IAB节点,用于向所述源IAB donor发送测量结果,所述测量结果包括源小区的信号测量结果和目标小区的信号测量结果中的至少一项,其中,所述源小区属于所述源IAB donor,所述目标小区属于所述目标IAB donorThe IAB node is configured to send a measurement result to the source IAB donor, where the measurement result includes at least one of the signal measurement result of the source cell and the signal measurement result of the target cell, wherein the source cell belongs to the Source IAB donor, the target cell belongs to the target IAB donor
    所述源IAB donor,用于基于所述测量结果,确定将所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor,则向所述目标IAB donor发送所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息;The source IAB donor is used to determine to switch the IAB node to the target IAB donor based on the measurement result, and then send the context information of the IAB node and at least the IAB node to the target IAB donor Context information of a child node;
    所述目标IAB donor,用于基于所述IAB节点的上下文信息和所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点的上下文信息,向所述源IAB donor发送所述IAB节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第一配置信息与所述IAB节点的至少一个子节点切换到所述目标IAB donor所需的第二配置信息;The target IAB donor is used to send, to the source IAB donor, what is needed for the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor based on the context information of the IAB node and the context information of at least one child node of the IAB node The first configuration information of and the second configuration information required for at least one child node of the IAB node to switch to the target IAB donor;
    所述源IAB donor,还用于向所述IAB节点发送所述第一配置信息与所述第二配置信息;The source IAB donor is also used to send the first configuration information and the second configuration information to the IAB node;
    所述IAB节点,还用于接收所述第一配置信息与所述第二配置信息,并向所述至少一个子节点发送所述第二配置信息。The IAB node is further configured to receive the first configuration information and the second configuration information, and send the second configuration information to the at least one child node.
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包含至少一段代码,所述至少一段代码可由源接入回传一体化宿主IAB donor执行,以控制所述IAB donor执行权利要求1至7任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by a source-accessed backhaul integrated host IAB donor to control all The IAB donor executes the method described in any one of claims 1 to 7.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序包含至少一段代码,所述至少一段代码可由接入回传一体化IAB节点执行,以控制所述IAB节点执行权利要求8至14任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, the computer program includes at least one piece of code, the at least one piece of code can be executed by an integrated IAB node for access and return to control the IAB The node executes the method according to any one of claims 8 to 14.
PCT/CN2019/106474 2019-09-18 2019-09-18 Switching method and device WO2021051313A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/106474 WO2021051313A1 (en) 2019-09-18 2019-09-18 Switching method and device
CN201980100408.7A CN114402661B (en) 2019-09-18 2019-09-18 Switching method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/106474 WO2021051313A1 (en) 2019-09-18 2019-09-18 Switching method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021051313A1 true WO2021051313A1 (en) 2021-03-25

Family

ID=74883305

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/106474 WO2021051313A1 (en) 2019-09-18 2019-09-18 Switching method and device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114402661B (en)
WO (1) WO2021051313A1 (en)

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021262077A1 (en) * 2020-06-26 2021-12-30 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Iab-node handover in inter-cu migration, recursive f1 and rrc signaling aspects
CN115604778A (en) * 2022-11-28 2023-01-13 广州世炬网络科技有限公司(Cn) Node access method, device, equipment and storage medium
WO2023011403A1 (en) * 2021-08-03 2023-02-09 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Mobile access point, and pci distribution method and device therefor
WO2023070554A1 (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-04 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for mobility handling for mobile iab deployments
WO2024093765A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, apparatus and system, and storage medium

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117295135A (en) * 2022-06-17 2023-12-26 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and computer readable storage medium

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109275177A (en) * 2018-09-17 2019-01-25 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 A kind of method, apparatus and system of IAB base station access network network
US20190141762A1 (en) * 2016-09-29 2019-05-09 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Initial access and radio resource management for integrated access and backhaul (iab) wireless networks

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108990116B (en) * 2017-06-01 2021-08-06 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Management method, device and equipment for mobile switching
US10932168B2 (en) * 2017-09-29 2021-02-23 Apple Inc. Next generation node-B (gNB) and methods for mobility management with separate user plane and control plane in new radio (NR) systems
CN110149674A (en) * 2018-02-13 2019-08-20 华为技术有限公司 A kind of route renewing method and equipment

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20190141762A1 (en) * 2016-09-29 2019-05-09 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Initial access and radio resource management for integrated access and backhaul (iab) wireless networks
CN109275177A (en) * 2018-09-17 2019-01-25 武汉虹信通信技术有限责任公司 A kind of method, apparatus and system of IAB base station access network network

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI: "Inter-Donor CU Topology Adaptation", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-190496 INTER-DONOR TOPOLOGY ADAPTATION, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. Athens; 20180225 - 20180301, 15 February 2019 (2019-02-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051604436 *
HUAWEI: "Intra Donor-DU topology adaptation procedure", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-190562 INTRA DONOR-DU TOPOLOGY ADAPTATION PROCEDURE (38.401), 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. Athens; 20190225 - 20190301, 15 February 2019 (2019-02-15), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051604499 *
LG ELECTRONICS INC.: "Inter-donor topology adaptation for architecture 1a", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-186751 INTER-DONOR TOPOLOGY ADAPTATION FOR ARCHITECTURE 1A, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. Spokane, WA, USA; 20181112 - 20181116, 11 November 2018 (2018-11-11), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France, XP051558513 *

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021262077A1 (en) * 2020-06-26 2021-12-30 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Iab-node handover in inter-cu migration, recursive f1 and rrc signaling aspects
WO2023011403A1 (en) * 2021-08-03 2023-02-09 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Mobile access point, and pci distribution method and device therefor
WO2023070554A1 (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-04 Nokia Shanghai Bell Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for mobility handling for mobile iab deployments
WO2024093765A1 (en) * 2022-11-04 2024-05-10 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, apparatus and system, and storage medium
CN115604778A (en) * 2022-11-28 2023-01-13 广州世炬网络科技有限公司(Cn) Node access method, device, equipment and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114402661B (en) 2024-03-26
CN114402661A (en) 2022-04-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021051313A1 (en) Switching method and device
US10362519B2 (en) Handover apparatus and method
WO2017054538A1 (en) Method for establishing auxiliary signaling link, and device, base station and terminal therefor
US10660006B2 (en) Bearer handover control device and control method
US10856354B2 (en) Radio communication system, network device, and radio communication method
CN112399507B (en) Method for transmitting data, terminal equipment and network equipment
US9807667B2 (en) Method for relocating gateway, mobile management entity and host base station
US20160242224A1 (en) Mobile terminal communication control methods, devices and related equipment
CN113543251A (en) Method and equipment for switching between different MeNB (MeNB) in small cell system
US10728805B2 (en) Bearer establishment method and apparatus
CN116614846A (en) Data forwarding method, device and system
US20210274395A1 (en) Data communication method and apparatus
WO2015161575A1 (en) Method, base station, mobile management entity, and system for reporting location of user terminal
CN110972215B (en) Switching method and base station
WO2016161785A1 (en) Cross-menb switching method and apparatus and base station
US20200296636A1 (en) Cell handover method and apparatus
WO2017166291A1 (en) Communication method, terminal, base station, and mobility management equipment
WO2020088177A1 (en) Communication method, mobility management entity, user equipment, and serving gateway
JP2023546424A (en) IAB node migration method and device
US20240121683A1 (en) Upf based transmision of user data for selective activation to selective activation candidate nodes
US20240015098A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving signal and communication system
WO2022205252A1 (en) Signal sending and receiving method and apparatus, and communication system
CN114079912B (en) Traffic information reporting method, base station and system
CN117796000A (en) Integrated access and backhaul communication device and method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19945952

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19945952

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1